summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/68177-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/68177-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/68177-0.txt6827
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 6827 deletions
diff --git a/old/68177-0.txt b/old/68177-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 1bcfc74..0000000
--- a/old/68177-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6827 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of Among unknown Eskimo, by Julian W.
-Bilby
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: Among unknown Eskimo
-
-Author: Julian W. Bilby
-
-Photographer: Archibald Lang Fleming
-
-Release Date: May 26, 2022 [eBook #68177]
-
-Language: English
-
-Produced by: Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed Proofreading
- Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project Gutenberg (This
- file was produced from images generously made available by
- The Internet Archive/Canadian Libraries)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AMONG UNKNOWN ESKIMO ***
-
-
-
-
-
- AMONG
- UNKNOWN ESKIMO
-
- AN ACCOUNT OF TWELVE YEARS INTIMATE RELATIONS
- WITH THE PRIMITIVE ESKIMO OF ICE-BOUND
- BAFFIN LAND, WITH A DESCRIPTION OF
- THEIR WAYS OF LIVING, HUNTING
- CUSTOMS & BELIEFS
-
-
- BY
- JULIAN W. BILBY
-
- Fellow of the Royal Geographical Society
- Member of the Folk Lore Society
-
-
-
- WITH THIRTY-THREE ILLUSTRATIONS & A MAP
-
- PHILADELPHIA
- J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY
- LONDON: SEELEY, SERVICE & CO., Ltd.
- 1923
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-PREFACE
-
-
-In offering the present book on the Eskimo tribes of the Arctics to the
-reading British public, I must discharge the grateful and pleasing duty
-of acknowledging my indebtedness for much courtesy and documentary
-assistance to the Canadian Government, in the person of F. C. C. Lynch,
-Esq., Superintendent of the “National Resources Branch of the
-Department of the Interior.” He has been zealously instrumental in
-enabling me to consult sources of classic recent information of which
-otherwise I should not have had the confirmation and the benefit, and
-also has placed at my publishers’ disposal the section of the official
-map which represents the most up-to-date geographical information about
-Baffin Land.
-
-There is a considerable literature about the Eskimo (as distinct from a
-quite formidable list of works dealing with travel and voyages in the
-Arctics) which should be consulted by students of ethnography.
-
-The classical authorities in this department are Dr Franz Boas and Dr
-Rink, a study of whose researches should underlie all the more recent
-first-hand contributions to what must remain for a long time to come a
-new subject.
-
-For the photographs I am greatly indebted to the Rev. A. L. Fleming,
-L.T.H., who spent several years among the Eskimo of South Baffin Land.
-His photos were taken during many intrepid journeys in those wilds, and
-he knew exactly the scenes it was desired to record by photography in
-this work. I am also indebted to Miss A. B. Teetgen for her assistance
-in the literary construction of the book.
-
-Finally, I wish to record my admiration and respect for the genial and
-brave Eskimos of those barren lands, and for the way they face and
-overcome the difficulties of the Arctic wilds.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CONTENTS.
-
-
- PAGE
- CHAPTER I
- The Voyage to the Arctics 17
-
- CHAPTER II
- Baffin Land 32
-
- CHAPTER III
- Arctic Flora & Fauna 47
-
- CHAPTER IV
- The Eskimo 56
-
- CHAPTER V
- The Building of the Village 72
-
- CHAPTER VI
- The Sealing Grounds 85
-
- CHAPTER VII
- Womanhood in the Arctics 97
-
- CHAPTER VIII
- Clothing—Boat Building 108
-
- CHAPTER IX
- Eskimo Dogs 119
-
- CHAPTER X
- Tribal Life 136
-
- CHAPTER XI
- Tribal Life—continued 154
-
- CHAPTER XII
- The Eskimo Language 171
-
- CHAPTER XIII
- Legends 184
-
- CHAPTER XIV
- The Conjurors 196
-
- CHAPTER XV
- The Sedna Ceremony 210
-
- CHAPTER XVI
- The Native Surgeon 224
-
- CHAPTER XVII
- Sport & Hunting 235
-
- CHAPTER XVIII
- The Creatures of the Wild 252
-
- Appendix 265
-
- Index 271
-
-
-
-
-
-
-LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
-
-
- A Woman of the Fox Channel Tribe Frontispiece
- PAGE
- An Ancient Aboriginal Encampment 40
- Part of an Eskimo Tribe of Women and Children 56
- An Iglovegak or Eskimo Dwelling 64
- An Eskimo Tupik 73
- An Eskimo Snowhouse 76
- An Eskimo Home 80
- The Return of the Successful Seal Hunter in Springtime 88
- Young Seal Hunting in May 92
- Two Women in Summer Dress 96
- A Young Wife with her Baby in her Hood 104
- Eskimo Family Group 104
- Models of Kayak, Umiak, and Okushuk 112
- An Ancient Form of Sled 134
- The Two Wives of a Hunter 144
- An Eskimo Family outside their House 144
- Preparing for a Long Winter Journey 160
- A Native Chart 177
- Asseak and his Wife 200
- An Umiak or Family Boat 208
- The Summer Tent or Tapik 208
- A Conjuror’s Mask 211
- A Kagge or Singing House (Elevation) 218
- A Kagge or Singing House (Plan) 219
- An Eskimo Woman of the Fox Channel Tribe 224
- An Eskimo Summer Encampment 224
- Specimens of Native Stone Carving 232
- An Eskimo in his Kayak 240
- Beginning to Build a Snowhouse 240
- A Wolf Trap 255
- An Eskimo Trap for Bears, Foxes or Wolves 257
- A Seagull Trap 261
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-THE ESKIMO OF BAFFIN LAND
-
-
-CHAPTER I
-
-THE VOYAGE TO THE ARCTICS
-
-
-A voyage to the Arctics has always been a dangerous and exciting
-adventure, whether entered upon by whalers and hunters, intrepid men
-lured by the hardy business of the frozen North, or by the no less
-intrepid pioneers of exploration and of science. For the moment, we are
-not concerned with the latter, but rather with some aspects of life in
-the barren lands and icy seas north of “the Circle,” and with the
-adventures and experiences of the few ships’ crews who have been making
-yearly voyages in those regions for trading purposes ever since the
-efforts of the sixteenth century navigators to discover the famous
-North West Passage began to chart out these hitherto unnavigated seas.
-
-The search, indeed, for this passage, a sea route of communication
-between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans (or, in other words, a short
-way to the East Indies without doubling the Cape of Good Hope)—was
-incidentally the means of opening up the whole of the north polar
-regions to exploration and discovery. As early as the year 1527, the
-idea of such a passage was suggested to Henry VIII by a merchant of
-Bristol; but it was not until the beginning of the following century
-that a first expedition was fitted out at the expense of some London
-merchants and despatched to the arctic seas.
-
-Centuries before this, however, the Arctic Ocean was entered by a
-Norwegian adventurer about the time of King Alfred; and the west coast
-of Greenland was colonised from Iceland early in the eleventh century.
-But no further progress was made in arctic discovery until the
-sixteenth century, when various seas and points of land were mapped
-out, mainly in the eastern hemisphere. The navigator Henry Hudson
-discovered the Straits and Bay named after him in the great North
-American archipelago, in 1610. Frobisher, Drake, and Hall, made voyages
-to the west coasts of Greenland and to the opposite coasts; but the
-entrance to the arctic regions west of that continent was discovered by
-John Davis in 1585. In 1616, Baffin and Bylot passed through this
-passage and sailed up Smith Sound, but nothing further was learned of
-these parts for another two hundred years.
-
-The Eskimo preserve to this day the story of Frobisher. It was, indeed,
-narrated to the writer with a wealth of authentic detail by a native,
-to whom it had been handed down amid other oral traditions of his tribe
-and locality.
-
-“Now it is said that Frobisher, coming to Nauyatlik for the first time,
-not knowing the place or where there was a safe anchorage, crept along
-the side (of the land) in his small ship, and was wrecked. For it was
-shallow water there, and getting aground, he ordered the fuel (coal) to
-be taken out and carried ashore to a place called Akkelasak. For the
-ship was no longer habitable. The crew found refuge on a small, flat
-island, and pitched tents there of the vessel’s sails, and began to
-fashion a graving dock by digging out the soft ground. When it was
-finished, they towed the wreck to the spot and docked her. All this
-happened a long time ago, but traces of their work are still visible.
-The shipwrecked sailors overhauled the hull. When at length their
-repairs and rebuilding were complete, they towed out the ship and
-moored her alongside a cliff, at the top of which they fixed their
-tackle, unstepped and restepped the mast, their task being completed.
-At last, and having buried those of their shipmates who had died during
-this weary time, they abandoned the remainder of their fuel and set
-sail for home. This is the narrative of one who had it from her mother,
-who in turn had received it from her dead father, who had it from his
-forbears; for thus they were accustomed to narrate it.”
-
-The above translation, of course, is very free. It would interest the
-philologist to have it in the original, or even in a literal version;
-but possibly the foregoing will convey to the general reader that
-graphic grasp of the story which renders all Eskimo history so reliable
-and enduring.
-
-The attempt to find a north west passage by sea, from the Atlantic
-Ocean to Behring Strait, where farthest east meets farthest west, was
-abandoned until Commander John Ross, in modern times (1818), was sent
-out to prosecute further exploration in the Arctic. Throughout the
-nineteenth century, many intrepid voyages were made, with which the
-names of such men as Parry, Ross, Richardson, Rae and Franklin are
-associated. Prior to this wonderful epoch of dauntless adventure, all
-within the Arctic Circle upon the map was a blank. The entire geography
-of the Canadian arctic archipelago has been worked out, defined,
-charted, and named, since that time. Voyages of discovery were made in
-rapid succession, after Sir John Ross’s expedition in 1818, many of the
-leaders working in conjunction with the officials of the Hudson Bay Fur
-Trading Company, who were anxious to determine the extent and limits of
-the immense continent they controlled, now known as the North West
-Territories. Every name upon the arctic map, whether of sea, sound,
-inlet, strait, island, peninsula or cape, is a historical association
-with the personnel or the patrons of these numerous expeditions.
-
-All the islands of the Arctic Archipelago lying to the northward of the
-mainland of the continent, and the whole of Baffin Land, form part of
-the British possessions in North America by right of discovery. They
-were formally transferred to the Dominion of Canada by Order in Council
-of the Imperial Government on September 1st, 1880.
-
-An immense amount of scientific information was derived from all this
-hardship, endurance and enterprise. The story of Sir John Franklin
-alone is a deathless epic in the annals of this seafaring nation. And
-the whole field was opened up for the whalers, sealers, hunters and
-fishers, whose business it soon became to demonstrate that arctic
-exploration had a bearing on commerce and the hardier industries of
-maritime mankind.
-
-The whaling trade originated as early as the discoveries of Barentz and
-Hudson, but Sir John Ross opened up the northernmost waters of Baffin’s
-Bay to it, in recent times. The search for the North West Passage,
-indeed, proved abortive for many years, owing to the fact that the
-season in which it was possible to navigate in very high latitudes only
-lasted about seven weeks. The most experienced men, though, never gave
-up the theory of the probability of its existence. Half a century went
-by before the route was found at last. Captain McClure, in the search
-for the long-lost Franklin, achieved the discovery of two routes to the
-Behring Straits and the Pacific Ocean, in the autumn of the year 1850.
-Useless and futile as the discovery proved to be, who can sufficiently
-estimate and appraise all that has gone, of human worth and high
-resolve, of suffering and of life itself, to the making of it?
-
-Of the whalers and traders who followed in the wake of the explorers,
-the Scottish seamen have been the most persistent. Scotch vessels
-continue, to-day, to visit the Arctic every year. They sail from home
-in early summer, cross the North Atlantic, work their way up Davis’
-Strait, and, (unless they winter on the coast of Baffin Land or
-Greenland), return to Scotland late in “the fall.” Sometimes the
-practice was to make the passage, generally through open water, from
-Dundee to St. John’s, spend some weeks upon the sealing grounds, then
-return to refit at the Newfoundland port for a whaling cruise farther
-north in Lancaster Sound. Having secured their cargo of seal skins and
-oil, they return home. The vessels of the Dundee whaling fleet are
-designed and built for navigation in northern seas. The hull is of
-wood, on account of its resisting power where pressed by ice, and the
-hardwood (“greenheart”) sheathing minimises the abrasions caused by
-conflict with the jagged edges of the floes. The ship is immensely
-braced by stout cross beams inside. The cutwater is protected by iron
-bands or plates, to enable her to withstand the heavy strain of the
-ice. She is barque rigged (i.e., a square rigged vessel, having yards
-on the foremast and mainmast, but not on the mizzen mast), and fitted
-with steam, to enable her to proceed during a calm, to shear her way
-through ice, or to enter and leave harbour independently of wind or
-tide. On all other occasions she depends upon her sails. A whaler
-fitted after this fashion is called an “auxiliary steam vessel.” She
-sails, however, much faster than she can steam. She carries about 500
-tons of coal.
-
-Many of these tried and tested Scottish whaling ships have been bought
-up by the leaders of Arctic and Antarctic exploring expeditions, and
-remodelled and refitted for the scientific uses to which they would be
-put, and have done yeoman service in the assault on the Poles.
-
-Of late years the Hudson Bay Company (of historic and ubiquitous
-enterprise in Canada), have established posts on the southern shores of
-Baffin Land, (opposite to that northernmost region of the bleak
-Labrador known as Ungava), so that their ships, which sail from
-Montreal as annual supply ships for all the Company’s “Forts” and
-“Factories” along the Canadian coasts, have points of call along Hudson
-Strait en route for Hudson Bay itself and the fur ports of that vast
-inland sea.
-
-The Scotch whaling industry has various agents posted in many a bleak,
-un-heard of spot along the icebound littoral of the Eskimo countries,
-whose duty it is to collect and store the pelts brought in by the
-natives—employed by the agent—and ship them away annually or
-bi-annually, as the case may be.
-
-A whaling voyage was filled, especially in the earlier days, with as
-much danger as adventure. The ships were manned by sailors who had
-taken to the life as lads, or, held by the fascination of the North,
-returned thither year after year, seldom caring to make voyages
-elsewhere. They lived amid the ice. True northman and fine seaman, many
-a whaler’s master is proud of the fact that he began his career as a
-cabin boy and worked his way aft. He is a fighter, every inch of him,
-such as only “the wild” can breed. He has an iron code of honour, and a
-strain of true Norse hardness in him for his enemy. But he has also the
-manly virtues of his type—fidelity to his fellows, and generosity to
-lesser men than himself.
-
-Previous to an Arctic voyage, months were spent in the commissioning of
-these vessels. Every rope and block was overhauled. The ships’ boats
-were rigorously tested and each carefully fitted out. Food and stores
-of all kinds were taken aboard wholesale, against every contingency
-experience and foresight could suggest, especially that of a forced
-wintering in the north. An armoury of weapons was carried: harpoons and
-harpoon guns for the boats, lances for killing whales, huge knives for
-cutting up the carcases, bombs, hatchets, rifles and ammunition. No
-less exhaustive was the inventory of the “trade”—articles for the
-Eskimo trade and barter—such as needles, soaps (scented and otherwise),
-pipes, matches, calico, beads, and, above all, tobacco! Every boy’s
-book of adventure will suggest the scope of the slop chest, the
-incredible handiness and nattiness of the galley, the reek of the
-fo’c’sle, the snug dignity of the Captain’s cabin, and the compressed
-completeness of an equipment designed to last a ships’ entire crew (let
-us say her tonnage is about 129, and her company number twenty-nine)
-over many months of toil, emergency, and utter isolation. She carried
-no doctor. The first mate presided over the medicine chest, and had
-resort to some small book of directions as to what to give and what to
-do in case of illness or accident. In the early days adventurers to the
-Arctic were sorely stricken with scurvy, for want of vegetable food and
-a knowledge of how to provide against this deficiency. We have often
-heard of desperate feats of amateur surgery carried out on board ship.
-It has been that the mate of a whaling vessel often acted, not at all
-unsuccessfully, as surgeon.
-
-Doctor William S. Bruce, indeed, tells us in his “Polar Exploration”
-that, generally speaking, germ diseases are unknown in the Arctic, the
-intense cold making everywhere—in the air, on the sea and on the
-land—for a high degree of bacterial sterility. “Under ordinary
-conditions it is not possible to ‘catch cold’ in the polar regions ....
-infectious fevers are practically unknown, unless contracted in a dirty
-ship or filthily kept house.” Hence the feasibility of a practical
-asepsis in accident or operation. Bishop Bompass once amputated a man’s
-leg above the knee, and the operation was completely successful. The
-Bishop had no medical knowledge beyond having attended some lectures at
-an opthalmic hospital, in order to learn how to treat his Indians for
-snow-blindness.
-
-The whaling voyage itself might be uneventful enough until a high
-latitude was reached; but after that, the greatest possible skill was
-required to navigate the ship safely through the “pack” ice coming down
-from the Pole through Davis Straits and Fox Channel, on its way to the
-coast of Labrador and Newfoundland, to be finally melted and dispersed
-in the Gulf Stream.
-
-Arctic navigators and oceanographers enumerate many varieties and
-vagaries of the polar ice. Suffice it here to note that “pack ice” is
-the jammed and frozen conglomeration of masses of ice from broken floes
-and vast disintegrating “fields” of ice. In Straits, this pack is
-always heaviest in the centre but less compact along the shores, so
-that a vessel can sometimes be worked along the coast when navigation
-in the middle would be impossible. This “middle pack” is rightly
-dreaded by Arctic seamen. A change of wind might drift it in upon the
-shore, when the ship’s destruction would be inevitable. The great
-danger in meeting the ice pack out at sea consists in the fact that the
-larger part of the floe is almost submerged and little of it is to be
-seen. Again, it bristles with spurs and points which stick up and out
-like spears and rams, any one of which might rip up a hull sailing at
-any speed.
-
-The rapidity with which the ice pack moves is something wonderful.
-Miles upon miles of sea will be free from ice, with the exception of
-small masses from the floes, and the ship ploughs a steady course to
-the north. Suddenly the wind changes. Ice swiftly makes its appearance
-on every quarter, and—with incredible rapidity—the vessel is
-surrounded. But warning has been given from the “crow’s nest” (the
-look-out aloft, a barrel at masthead), and the Master works a cautious
-way through the “leads” in the shifting ice. Should the pack be
-exceptionally heavy, threatening to pen in the ship completely,
-measures for her safety are immediately taken. Orders ring out sharply.
-The crew, with ice saws or blasting powder, quickly make a space in the
-ice, like a temporary dock, large enough to warp her into, where she
-can lie snug while the savage floes grind and crash against each other
-without. Woe to the ship caught between them ere such a refuge can be
-made! No vessel that ever adventured in the polar seas could stand the
-awful grip. There would be a rending of the stoutest timbers, groans of
-a ship in agony, a lift and a quiver, and as the floes swung apart on
-the black swell below, the brave creature, mangled, rent, and stove in,
-would plunge to her bitter grave. As for her crew, their only chance
-would be to lower the boats, and, either marooned on the ice, drift
-south on the prevailing current until perchance sighted by a ship; or,
-if afloat, work their perilous way to the Greenland coast, and take
-refuge at one of the Danish settlements sparsely scattered on its
-southern extremity.
-
-Icebergs—those rightly dreaded wanderers of the northern seas—afford a
-glorious vision in bright, calm weather, as they wend their majestic
-course to the south, tinted by the setting sun or by the indescribable
-loveliness of the northern sunrise. Sometimes a large portion having
-been melted, breaks from the berg, when the vast mass slowly careens
-over, plunges with a thunderous crash, and reasserts itself upon a new
-floating base, peerless and beautiful as ever. The ship is fortunate
-who finds herself standing well away at such a moment.
-
-In spite, however, of their bad reputation, the bergs have their uses
-for those hardy wayfarers of the sea who know them. The ancient Arctic
-mariner will tell you that an iceberg can sail against the wind as well
-as with it! Gripped for two-thirds of its bulk by a strong
-under-current, it can crash its way and forge ahead against the wildest
-adverse gale. An old whaler told of an experience he had when his ship
-was beset by the loose floe, and like to be crushed to matchwood. The
-men were striving all they knew to get her into safety, when a vast
-berg drove slowly down beside her through the ice, shouldering it aside
-as a giant liner drives through a heavy sea. With the inspiration of
-sheer desperation, the Captain saw his chance! The vessel was
-cautiously worked still nearer the berg and then kedged on to it. Towed
-thus, with resistless might, she too forged safely through the chafing
-floe to clear water and deliverance.
-
-Again, a ship—no matter of what class or tonnage—can only carry a
-certain quantity of water. So, too, with a whaler; she is limited in
-her supply. It sometimes happens that, cruising about week after week,
-she runs short of water. On sighting an iceberg, she sends off her
-boats loaded with casks, and the crews refill them either with water
-from the pools at the foot of the berg, or with the ice itself, which
-being fresh water ice, melts down, of course, into splendid drinking
-water after the brine and salt coating from the sea has first been
-scraped off. For, be it remembered, an iceberg is a portion—the seaward
-end—of one of the polar glaciers. As the immense ice river reaches the
-coast it is pushed out over the cliffs, and vast masses break off with
-terrific detonation, plunge into the sea, and the newly born icebergs
-go floating far and wide. A large number of these bergs are formed in
-Eternity Fiord on the Greenland coast, and the crash and roar of them
-can be heard for miles.
-
-As the season wears on and the whaler’s hold slowly fills with the
-cargo of the Arctic hunt, from time to time she puts into the sparse
-harbours of the northern coasts, to refit, or to meet the tribes of
-Eskimo gathered there to do “trade” with her. The Hudson Bay Company
-have lately introduced a form of coinage for this purpose, anything of
-the sort being previously quite unknown among the natives. Pieces of
-metal in various shapes represent the values of a currency and are used
-as money. But the prehistoric marketing of barter still holds good
-throughout the greater part of the Arctic regions.
-
-Sometimes a shipmate has to be left, perforce of accident or illness,
-to sleep the long sleep that knows no earthly waking, in this drear and
-far-off land.
-
-So much then for the voyage and the voyagers to the Arctic. Now for
-that frozen world itself, and for those strange people whose lot,
-compared with that of all the rest of the more genially situated sons
-of men, would seem to have fallen in the bleakest, harshest and most
-forbidding places, where human life might scarcely exist.
-
-When the first ship seen by an Eskimo tribe touched on the coast, what
-did they think of it; what was the bewildering impression they got? An
-old hunter, recounting the story of his tribe and its adventures, gave
-the writer a graphic account of just such an event. An enormous boat,
-he said, appeared, filled with Kabloonâtyet (strangers), speaking an
-unknown tongue and having hairy faces! The tall masts were hung with
-the clouds (sails), and there was a door in the roof (the companion
-leading from the deck), instead of in the side of the house. At first
-the tribesmen hovered round this amazing thing in their canoes, afraid
-to approach too near. Presents were thrown out to them of which they
-could make nothing. They just smelt at the tobacco, biscuit and sweets,
-and cast them aside. There were knives, but they cut themselves with
-these, not knowing how to handle steel ones. It was almost as if some
-unimaginable craft from another sphere were to visit the Earth and make
-incomprehensible overtures to us by means of objects which conveyed
-nothing to our intelligence—something after the style of Mr. Wells’s
-Martians. At last, however, looking glasses resolved the situation.
-These the Eskimo received with huge delight and amazement. Eventually
-they were induced to board the strange boat and open up some sort of
-initial overtures with her alarming crew. His fore-fathers, said the
-old hunter, had seen these things and carefully handed them down.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER II
-
-BAFFIN LAND
-
-
-A landfall in the Arctics is forbidding enough. Little is to be seen
-save bare rocks broken by ravines, filled with snow even so late as far
-into July and August—bare rocks, rising into gaunt hills from 500 to
-1,500 feet high. The coastline is broken by bays and fiords, running
-deep inland. These inlets with their irregular outlines have a singular
-if rather drear beauty of their own, especially in the summer-time,
-when what little vegetation there may be—a spare, coarse grass and a
-red and white variety of heather—adds a grateful note of relief to the
-severe scene. There are miles and miles of rocky coast in places, where
-not so much as a handful of soil to support the hardiest little living
-thing could be found.
-
-Baffin Land, or Baffin Island—the country with which this book has to
-do—is an immense portion of the Canadian Arctic archipelago lying
-between latitude 62° and 72° N. By far the greater part of it extends
-north of the Arctic Circle, while its southern-most cape touches the
-latitude of the Faroe Islands, ’twixt the Shetlands and Iceland, in our
-own more familiar waters. The whole country lies far beyond the
-northernmost limit of trees, although it is not without an Arctic flora
-of its own. Baffin Sea, or Baffin Bay (that stretch of the North
-Atlantic Ocean which, beyond Davis Strait, divides the west coast of
-Greenland from North America), was discovered by the navigator William
-Baffin in 1615. Hence the name of the country. Discredit was thrown
-throughout the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries on Baffin’s work in
-the north; and, after him, Arctic exploration ceased for about two
-centuries. Then Sir John Ross verified Baffin’s observations in 1818,
-and many of them became the bases of later expeditionary enterprise.
-
-A glance at the map shows how the country lies. To the north of it,
-beyond the whaling grounds of Lancaster Sound, Devon Island is the next
-stretch of the poleward tapering continent. The Gulf of Bothnia and Fox
-Channel divide it on the west from the enormously broken coasts of the
-North West Territories. “The territory now known as Baffin Land was,
-until about 1875, supposed to consist of different islands, known as
-Cockburn Island, Cumberland Island, Baffin’s Land, Sussex Island, Fox
-Land, etc. It seems to be now established that these are all connected
-and that there is but one great island, comprising them all, to which
-the name of Baffin Land has been given. It forms the northern side of
-Hudson Strait.... It has a length of about 1,005 English statute miles,
-with an average breadth of 305 miles, its greatest width being 500 and
-its least 150 miles. Its area approximates 300,000 square miles, and it
-therefore comprises about one tenth of the whole Dominion. It is the
-third largest island in the world, being exceeded only by Australia and
-Greenland” (Annual Report of Geolog. Survey of Canada, 1898.)
-
-It is an entirely Arctic country, immediately north of which runs the
-polar limit of human habitation.
-
-Up to the actual time of writing, Baffin Land has been held to be
-incapable of inland commercial development, but a Royal Commission of
-the Government of the Dominion have recently examined the possibility
-of establishing there a reindeer and muskox ranching industry. Their
-report has not yet been published, but already some steps are being
-taken to realise such a project. If this should have results, a new
-means of livelihood would be opened up to the Eskimo, at present
-employed exclusively by the whaling agents on the coast. But the
-natives are not herders, and in all probability Lapps would be brought
-over from northern Europe to initiate the industry. From this would
-ensue doubtless some racial modifications—probably quite inappreciable
-to any but those observers, like the present writer, used to the pure
-and unmixed Eskimo stock. In the present book, little account will be
-taken of those tribes which have been in contact with other races, like
-those of Alaska and Labrador, whence results hybridization or
-degeneration. The writer proposes to confine his attention entirely to
-the people of ancient, unmixed blood, and to depict their life and
-customs as uninfluenced by the forces of trade and civilisation, which
-are already threatening to usher in a new era and extinguish the last
-representatives of the “reindeer age.”
-
-From another point of view, however, Baffin Land should not pass
-without remark. It has certain undetermined mineral resources. At Cape
-Durban, on the 67th parallel, coal is known to exist, and graphite
-(plumbago) has been found abundant and pure in several islands. Again,
-pyrites and mica are all to be found in its rocks.
-
-The geology of the Arctic regions is, of course, a study in itself
-beyond the scope of this book. It may be of interest, however, to note
-that the two great distinctive bodies of rock to be observed in a
-country like Baffin Land are the granite and the finer grained, darker,
-basic rock. The ironstone from there is very similar to that brought
-from India to be smelted in England. The graphite might be mistaken for
-coal, but for its formation under geological conditions which could not
-have given rise to the latter. The two pyrites occur in the rocks of
-all ages; the one is a brassy yellow, very hard mineral, and the other
-a brilliant black stone (magnetic pyrites) looking much like a mass of
-loosely formed crystals. Garnets are also formed in several kinds of
-rock, but are chiefly to be found in the schist. As a rule, these
-little gems are far too much broken and split by the intense frost to
-be worth collecting. In the winter, the hardest rock is so split by the
-cold that every peculiarity of its composition can be clearly seen. The
-graphite can be chipped out with an axe and utilised very conveniently
-for writing.
-
-The scenery everywhere is typical of the “Barrens,” the “Bad Lands of
-the North.” In winter, a featureless waste of snow, where in that dark
-season “come those wonderful nights of glittering stars and northern
-lights playing far and wide upon the icy deserts; or where the moon,
-here most melancholy, wanders on her silent way through scenes of
-desolation and death. In these regions the heavens count for more than
-elsewhere; they give colour and character, while the landscape, simple
-and unvarying, has no power to draw the eye.” (Nansen.) In summer, when
-the iron grip of ice is relaxed around the frozen coast, snow may
-disappear from the interminable wastes of rounded granite hills which
-are a feature of the interior. The effect of this endless succession of
-low bare elevations is one of “appalling desolation.” The long,
-high-pitched howl of the wolf, the ultimate note of the wilderness,
-falls occasionally upon the ear of the twilight camper. This, and the
-cry of the loon from the lakes, with the crowing bleat of the ptarmigan
-in the low scrub, are the chance evening sounds (of spring and summer)
-in the Barrens.
-
-The country generally is mountainous and of a hilly and barren aspect.
-In some districts comparatively level Laurentian areas occur, where
-immense herds of reindeer roam in the summer. At this season the ranges
-have a dark or nearly black appearance, owing to the growth of lichens
-upon them, but this sombre character is often relieved in valleys and
-on hill-sides by strips and patches of green, due to grasses and sedges
-in the lower bottoms, and a variety of flowering plants on sheltered
-slopes exposed to the sun.
-
-The high interior of Baffin Land, lying just north of Cumberland Sound,
-is apparently all covered with ice, like the interior of Greenland.
-Around the margins of this ice cap the general elevation above the sea
-is about 5,000 feet, and it rises to about 8,000 feet in the central
-parts. Large portions of the northern interior are over 1,000 feet
-above the sea, so that vast regions of the country may be said to be
-truly mountainous.
-
-There are no trees or shrubs of any kind in Baffin Land. Of Arctic
-flowers, a small yellow poppy seems to be the hardiest and most
-widespread. Even in those parts where desolation seems to reign
-supreme, this poppy (Papaver radicatum), and a tiny purple saxifrage
-(Saxifraga appositifolia) can generally be discerned. There are coarse
-grasses growing in scant patches, and immense tracts of reindeer moss,
-upon which the cariboo entirely subsist.
-
-Unlike the sterile Antarctic, however, it is well known that the flora
-of Arctic lands is a feature of such importance that it has been the
-subject of an immense amount of expert investigation carried out by
-very many eminent botanists from every country. Professor Bruce says it
-is quite impossible to enter into detail regarding arctic botany,
-largely on account of its sheer profusion. “No matter how far the
-explorer goes, no matter how desolate a region he visits, he is sure to
-come across one or more species of flowering plants.... Every arctic
-traveller is thoroughly familiar with scurvy grass, the sulphur
-coloured buttercup, the little bladder campion, several potentillas,
-the blaeberry, many saxifrages, the rock rose, the cotton grass and the
-arctic willow.” In Grinnell Land (far north of Baffin Land) the British
-Arctic Expedition of 1875 met with “luxuriant vegetation.” The presence
-or absence of the Arctic current along the shores of these countries
-seems to have much to do with the problems of vegetation. Baffin Land,
-bathed in its icy waters, is far more barren than Greenland, where it
-does not touch. Possibly Grinnell Land is immune from its influence. It
-is, nevertheless, quite possible for a dense plant life to
-flourish—under certain conditions of climate, altitude and
-situation—deep within the Arctic Circle, where even the tundra, a
-wilderness of snow in the winter, becomes an impassable fever-haunted,
-mosquito ridden, torrid, flower decked swamp in the summer.
-
-But there is more than this in the botany of Baffin Land! The natural
-or geological history of the Arctic regions generally is that of the
-earth’s crust itself, and from this point of view the study of these
-northern blossoms is more wonderful than that of its rocks.
-
-The fossil plants of these ice-bound countries belong to the Miocene
-period, an epoch warmer than the present, which preceded the glacial
-age now triumphant there. The latitudes of Baffin Land were once
-covered by extensive forests representing fifty or sixty different
-species of arborescent trees, most of them with deciduous leaves, some
-three or four inches in diameter, the elm, pine, oak, maple, plane, and
-even some evergreens, showing an entirely different condition of
-seasons to that which now holds sway in the far, far north. The modern
-botany of the Arctics, comprising some 300 kinds of flowering plants,
-besides mosses, algae, lichens, fungi, is characteristic of the
-Scandinavian peninsula. Now, the Scandinavian flora is one of the
-oldest on the globe. It represents unique problems in distribution,
-from which the most tremendous scientific deductions have been drawn,
-such as those concerning a former disposition of terrestrial continents
-and oceans, and some concerning changes in the direction of the earth’s
-axis itself! All this is very far beyond the scope of any such account
-of Baffin Land as the present. Suffice it, nevertheless, to indicate
-the deep vistas of interest that lie behind the “appalling desolation”
-of its appearance to-day, and the limitations of its hyperborean native
-folk.
-
-The reindeer moss is a very important asset of the country. It is a
-delicate grey-green in colour and beautiful in form as well. It grows
-luxuriantly to about the height of six inches. When dry, it is brittle,
-and may be crumbled to powder in the hands; but when wet it is very
-much of the consistency of jelly, and very slippery. The reindeer live
-entirely upon it all the year round. In the winter, when it lies under
-a deep blanket of snow, to get at it the deer have to scrape their way
-down with their great splay hoofs. It sometimes happens that a season
-comes when a thaw may be followed by a sharp frost. In this case the
-surface of the snow is first melted and then quickly frozen, making a
-coating of ice over all the surface of the ground. To scrape this would
-cut the deers’ legs, so there is an exodus of the herd to other feeding
-places, and hunger even to famine and starvation may reign in the
-district they have deserted. Generally speaking, the herds keep to the
-high grounds and hills in the winter, because there the moss is more
-exposed and easier to come at. They move down to the coast at
-intervals, to lick the salt which comes up through the “sigjak,” i.e.,
-ground ice, along the shore, when the tides rises and the water leaves
-pools behind it.
-
-The deer feed in a peculiar manner. Once a pit has been sunk in the
-snow and the moss at the bottom is browsed down, the creatures do not
-attempt to enlarge the place, but scramble out again, only to dig a
-fresh hole and sink shoulder high in it at a little distance, and begin
-feeding afresh. The herd is always dogged by a pack of watchful wolves,
-ever on the qui vive to attack; but the leaders’ vigilance never
-slackens, and battle breaks out in the wild at the first movement of
-aggression.
-
-There are one or two particularly interesting facts, astronomical and
-otherwise, which account for the extraordinary physical phenomena and
-conditions of life in the polar regions. To begin with the seasons. The
-“Arctic” properly so called is geographically defined by that circle of
-latitude where the sun on midwinter day does not rise, and where on
-midsummer day it does not set. In Arctic countries the sun is never
-more than 23½ degrees above the horizon, and their intense cold is due,
-in summer, to the sharp obliquity of his rays, and in winter, to his
-entire absence. In the latitude of Blacklead Island, on December 25th,
-the whole orb of the sun is not visible, only the upper section shows
-above the horizon (unless mist or snow overcast the heavens) for a
-brief ten minutes at midday. On May 18th, conversely, the sun has been
-noted as shining for eighteen hours, the remaining six out of the
-twenty-four being a bright twilight, scarcely distinguishable from day.
-
-The whole year round there is little to be seen but rocks and snow. No
-tilling, sowing, harvesting, mark the progress of the seasons or call
-man to the pursuits which have brought all civilisation in their train
-in milder climes. These seasons (which depend, of course, upon the
-position of the earth in its orbit round the sun, and upon the
-inclination of the polar axis to the plane of the ecliptic giving a six
-month’s day and six month’s night at the poles), are markedly defined
-in Baffin Land. But far more distinctly so on shore than at sea, where
-unbroken ice may reign supreme throughout the greater part of the
-twelve-month. Winter sets in on the southern coast about the end of
-September; farther north a week or two earlier. By this date the hills
-are getting their snow caps, which extend downwards every day, and a
-thin sheet of ice appears upon the sea at night. A rim of ice along the
-shore marks the rise and fall of the tide. Frequent snowstorms now set
-in, and the ice at sea thickens and strengthens, until by November it
-extends as far as the eye can rove. This ice, however, is not stout or
-welded enough to bear sleds, except in the fiords and smaller bays,
-until nearly Christmas time. The sea freezes when the temperature of
-the air falls to about 15° F., and the whole surface of the water
-becomes covered with a mass of ice spicules known to polar sailors as
-Bay Ice, from its forming first in the bays of the coast. Presently
-this solidifies and thickens, growing ever whiter and more translucent
-in the process, and is broken, even in calm weather, by the action of
-gentle swell or the currents beneath into thousands of discs, large and
-small, like pans of ice. Sea ice is formed at a temperature of 3° F.
-below the freezing point of fresh water. There are many remarkable and
-interesting physical distinctions between ice formed on land and ice
-formed at sea. The latter when melted is quite drinkable, being not
-nearly so salt as salt water. The intense cold, though, of drinking
-water so obtained tends to inflame the mucous membrane of the mouth and
-throat, and its slight salinity still further augments thirst; so it is
-never resorted to except of necessity. These pans eventually freeze
-together into one great solid floor of “pancake ice,” and the Eskimo,
-away hunting in the winter for seal, may camp and live for weeks, miles
-out from land on the frozen sea.
-
-The days grow ever shorter and shorter until, in midwinter, there may
-be only a few hours or even minutes of daylight left. The long Arctic
-night lasts from September to March.
-
-By the end of March, however, the sun is once more high in the heavens;
-the sudden spring has begun, and the sound is everywhere heard of water
-trickling under the snow. Readers of Alaskan romance will recall many a
-fine passage about the ice “going out” on the Yukon, and realise the
-terrific transformation undergone by the whole still, silent, rigid,
-frozen landscape when the iron bonds of winter at length give way.
-Springtime in the Arctics is a wonderful time. The thaw comes from
-below. The rocks take the heat, and the snow sinks down, baring more
-and more of them every day. It grows quite warm; bird sounds (ptarmigan
-and snow bunting) enliven all the day; ducks quack at the floe edge.
-Sunrise beams upon the Arctic hills until they lie smiling in the full
-beauty of sunshine on their mantles of untrodden snow.
-
-At the end of June, summer is come; the sun is really hot, and the
-long-covered earth, bared at last to its benign influence, puts forth
-heather and grass and flowers. For six months there is no more night.
-Its place is taken by the pale light that offers so strange a
-phenomenon to the dweller from the south. If the sky be unclouded,
-shadows will be seen pointing to the south. If clouds cover the
-heavens, the landscape stands out without shadow at all, clear and
-sharp under this strange illumination. There is no one point from which
-the light can come; it comes from everywhere. Owing to the length of
-this Arctic “day,” the ground has no time to radiate away the welcome
-warmth, hence the rapid growth of what vegetation the region may show.
-Again, as Nansen says so poetically: “In these regions the heavens
-count for more than elsewhere: they give colour and character ... to
-the landscape ... it is flooded with that melancholy light which
-soothes the soul so fondly and is so characteristic of the northern
-night.”
-
-The stars are an open book to the Eskimo. They know all the principal
-groups, and use them for the directing of their journeys. They can make
-a very creditable chart of the northern heavens. They recognise the
-Plough, and the Bear (which is indeed called “Nanook”—the Bear), and
-they recognise the constellation of three stars in a straight line and
-at equal distances from each other, which they call the “Runners,” and
-describe as the spirits of three brothers in pursuit. The arctic
-hunters are marvellous students of nature generally. They have the lore
-of the wild at their finger tips, and all the wisdom of the seasons. It
-is probable that this primitive people have preserved nearly all the
-original instincts—as to the presence of danger, right direction, etc.,
-etc.—of primaeval man, which are all but extinct in the
-over-civilisation of the modern European.
-
-In August autumn begins. Last year’s ice has been broken up and carried
-far out to sea. There are frequent showers of rain, and the nights
-begin again to encroach more and more on the day. It is about this time
-that the trading ships generally arrive and put in at various points
-along the coast to do business and refit. They pick up the annual
-intelligence of the whaling stations, and leave for home as soon as the
-new ice begins to form.
-
-Then winter comes down upon the land once more. The sky, like velvet,
-is bespangled with stars of incomparable brilliance, burning like
-opals. The Northern Lights, like lambent curtains of amazing
-illumination, swing weirdly through the sky; the blanched hills and the
-frozen fiords stand out in ghostly black and white under the startling
-moonlight. There is no sound save the sharp cracking of rock or ice
-under the strain of the intense frost, the uneasy growl of dogs, the
-distant howl of a wolf.
-
-Suddenly, however, there may be a chorus of barking in the night, as a
-strange team of dogs sweeps into view up the fiord, or the harbour, and
-visitors descend upon the camp. Except for the noise, one could imagine
-the newcomers to be the ghosts of ancient hunters haunting their old
-grounds. But cheery cries, the crack of whips and the howls of the
-dogs, dispel any such idea as the group comes up. They are stalwart and
-sturdy individuals enough, clad from head to foot in deerskin, and
-covered with rime and frost. They are seeking hospitality here, and at
-once friendly doors are open to them, invitations are readily extended
-and accepted, and soon everyone of the strangers is comfortably
-bestowed (after Eskimo notions of comfort) in one or another of the
-various dwellings, the dogs are unharnessed and fed, and peace resumes
-her tranquil sway.
-
-The natives thus name the four seasons: Opingrak, spring; Auyak,
-summer; Okeoksak, autumn (i.e., material for winter), and Okeok,
-winter. The months are named by the sequence of events—the coming of
-the ducks, the birth of the reindeer fawns, the coming of the fish (sea
-trout), etc., as “the duck month,” “the fawn month,” “the fish month,”
-etc. And the days are distinguished as “oblo,” to-day; “koukpât,”
-to-morrow; “ikpuksâk,” yesterday; “ikpuksâne,” the day before
-yesterday, and so forth. “Akkâgo” means next year, and “akkâne” is last
-year.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER III
-
-ARCTIC FLORA AND FAUNA
-
-
-Another striking feature of the Arctics is the effect upon the
-appearance and character of those shores touched by the Gulf Stream, as
-compared with those where its waters never pass. Thus the coast of
-Greenland is comparatively luxuriant in vegetation and its seas teem
-with fish, while Baffin Land, opposite, washed by arctic currents, is
-desolate and barren, with no fishing off its shores. The same contrast
-holds good with respect to the north and south coasts of Hudson Strait.
-There are no cod off Baffin Land, but the Labrador fishermen ply their
-trade right into Hudson Bay.
-
-Baffin “Island” is a trackless, mysterious continent where, high up on
-the summits of some of the mountains, there are vast lakes fed from
-hidden springs—or from streams from still higher ranges—wherein salmon
-trout abound! At least, these fish are exactly like the sea trout which
-come up the rivers every year to spawn, save that the hue of the belly
-is bright red. The Eskimo point to this as proof that they never go
-down to the sea, and call them the “dirty fish,” since they never quit
-the lakes. How they ever got into them is a mystery the arctic
-zoölogist must be left to solve, since neither hunter nor fisherman can
-offer a suggestion. The trout could not have attained any such level
-upstream. It would almost appear—if one might hazard a guess—that at
-some remote geologic epoch this part of the N. American continent was
-submerged, for the Eskimo of Baffin Land speak of an inland sea, now
-dry, where fossil remains are to be found of large creatures such as
-the whale and walrus. They come across fossil fish, indeed, in their
-more extended wanderings, also shells, and bring them back to camp as
-curiosities.
-
-The Eskimo are properly a seaboard people and seldom penetrate farther
-inland than thirty miles from the coast, unless during the annual deer
-hunt, when they may be away for a couple of months, according to the
-distance the quest may take them.
-
-Possibly these unaccountable trout are the descendants of fish cut off
-from access to the sea, when the gradual rise of the continental level
-left lakes of originally salt water among the ranges. Where they are
-not without marine life (excepting those wonderful seaweeds which are
-found at the tropics as well as in the arctic), the waters round these
-shores contain many species of fish commonly known elsewhere, only in a
-much less developed state. Such creatures as sea anemones, shrimps, sea
-snails, small squid, and salt water centipedes, are to be found on the
-arctic beach. Naturalists enumerate a formidable list of the sort,
-bristling with scientific nomenclature. Then there are the mosquitoes,
-of which more anon, and small yellow, white and brown butterflies. It
-is indeed due to the comparatively rich fauna and flora of the arctic
-regions, both east and west, that arctic exploration has been carried
-out so frequently. The utter absence of plant or animal or human life
-in the dead antarctic has greatly militated against the success of
-southbound expeditions.
-
-To deal with the mosquitoes! These insects abound in the summer-time,
-and are a terrible pest. It is a puzzle how they survive the winter,
-when everything is frozen solid, and the very spots which thaw under
-the sudden warmth of an arctic spring and allow them to swarm out in
-their malignant millions are iron-bound as the rocks themselves for the
-greater part of the year. So formidable are these insects that man
-himself has sometimes fallen a victim to their onslaught. On one
-occasion, a polar bear was crossing a swamp on the prowl, when he was
-attacked by mosquitoes. They stung his eyes, the inside of his ears,
-penetrated his nostrils and stung them. As the nasal passages became
-inflamed and swollen, the bear was forced to open his mouth to breathe,
-when his enemies swarmed in, fastened on to tongue, palate and throat,
-causing them also to swell, until the tormented brute succumbed to
-suffocation. His howls attracted the attention of some Eskimo hunters,
-who afterwards told the tale.
-
-Another time, some women in a summer camp noticed a kyak (skin canoe)
-drifting about at sea in a curious way, and a man went off to
-investigate. On arriving within hail he found a body in the canoe,
-leaning back stone dead; done to death in precisely the same way by
-mosquitoes.
-
-Arctic birds are numerous. Most of them are migratory, but an eagle, a
-hawk, some owls and a raven, remain the year round. The most typical of
-all Arctic birds, the Snow Bunting (Plectrophenax nivalis), is the
-first to arrive and bring news of the spring. He comes about the same
-time as the Ptarmigan. Lastly comes the bird that always seems to greet
-the explorer on landing, the Purple Sandpiper (Tringa striata). He
-comes soon after the ducks—the Eider, the King Eider, the Pintail and
-the Harlequin. Between the two, there is a rapid vernal succession of
-birds, including sea pigeons and geese.
-
-Eskimo hunters speak of the wild swan, on the south coast and in the
-vicinity of Frobisher Bay. The raven is the only arctic bird which does
-not change its plumage to match the surroundings. He is always
-aggressively, blatantly black. Possibly, being so able a match for any
-ordinary foe, this bird has no need to adopt the “protective
-resemblance” of white. The writer has watched a raven alight to secure
-some tit-bit of offal, and keep even the wolfish Eskimo dog at a
-respectful distance, with its huge beak. The bird is cunning to a
-degree. It will follow a trapper, note the position of his traps, and
-return to visit and despoil them of their bait as soon as the coast is
-clear. Then it takes up its stand on some convenient rock just out of
-gunshot range, and watches the trapper on his return, just for all the
-world as if it relished his comments!
-
-So much for the land birds. At sea there are petrels, gulls, and skuas.
-The natives do not recognise pictures of puffins or penguins, as these
-birds are not known on their coasts.
-
-Again, the animals of the frozen north form quite a formidable list.
-There are three large lakes in Baffin Land (shown on the map at the
-end), linked together by rivers and making connection with the sea by
-river.
-
-The southern lake is called “Angmakjuak” (“the great one”). The length
-of this sea may indeed exceed 120 miles by 40 in breadth in its central
-part. The central lake, “Tesseyuakjuak,” is possibly 140 miles long by
-60 broad, and the northern lake “Netselik” (the place of seals) is at
-least 15 miles across. The difference in level between these great
-sheets of water is so inconsiderable that the natives can paddle with
-ease either up or down the waterways connecting them; perhaps none of
-them lie much higher than 300 feet above the sea. They teem with seal
-coming up from the coasts, and on the shores of Netselik old hunters
-will tell you they have seen the Red Fox, as well as white and smoky.
-This may well be so, as the fox is a denizen of Labrador, and might
-easily cross Hudson Strait on the ice during a hard winter. The seal of
-these lakes and of the coast (much hunted for food and for their skins
-by the natives), are the grey haired seals of wide-spread commerce, but
-not the fine, fur-bearing animals whose pelts are of the first beauty
-and value. This latter is a different species and is protected by
-Government, only a certain number being allowed to be killed each year.
-
-Bears, of course, abound. The female is the only arctic land creature
-which hibernates. Then there is the wolf, the white and blue fox, [1]
-the ermine, the arctic hare, a tailless snow mouse, or lemming, the
-musk ox, and—the most widely distributed of all—the cariboo or reindeer
-(Rangifer tarandus). It would be impossible to over-estimate the value
-of the last named beautiful creature, alive or dead, to all the peoples
-of the arctic countries, east or west. It would be superfluous here to
-remark much about it, except to note one interesting peculiarity. The
-reindeer differs from all other deer in that both sexes bear antlers.
-
-The wolves, of course, are the inveterate enemies of the deer. In the
-winter, when the latter herds leave the lowlands and go up to pasture
-among the hills, where the snow lies less deep and can be more easily
-scratched away, they are dogged by the wolves. These hungry and
-voracious creatures know well enough that the deer are sentinelled
-while feeding by their fighting males, and make no movement of
-aggression until one of them chances to stray from the herd. When this
-happens, the luckless animal is immediately headed off towards the
-shore and hunted down. The wolfish pack concentrates behind it and
-draws in on either side, so as to leave but one avenue of apparent
-escape. The quarry dashes down and away, out on towards the ice; but
-its weight is so great and its hoofs so sharp that the frozen crust of
-snow gives way beneath it and sorely cuts it about the legs. The deer
-loses blood and slackens in speed, so that the wolves, skimming easily
-over the treacherous surface, close in and soon drag it down.
-
-It is a fact well known to the Eskimo hunter that the actual chase is
-put up by the female wolf, the male only coming in at the last, for the
-kill. The former do the hustling and placing of the victim, as it were,
-and the latter do the fighting and killing at the end.
-
-The Lemming (Cuniculus torquatus) is a queer typical little arctic
-animal. It has a chubby build, a rudimentary tail, and no external
-ears. The first toe of the forepaw is almost nil, but the third and
-fourth have very strong claws, which grow longer and still more
-powerful in winter. It is grey in summer and white for the rest of the
-year. It lives upon the grubs to be found amid the moss under the snow,
-and burrows its way along as it searches for food. It is quite a
-familiar sound to hear the scratch, scratch, scratch of a lemming’s
-claws beneath, as one lies on the snow sleeping bench of an Eskimo’s
-igloo. The creature’s skin when dried is used by the natives for
-sticking over cuts or boils. It is hunted in the spring by the women
-and children, who are guided by the sound of its burrowings. They arm
-themselves with a stick having a long barbed wire attached, and spear
-the animal with this through the snow.
-
-Around the coasts there are various species of whales. The Grampus
-(Orca gladiator) or killer, as it is called by the whalers, is a fierce
-member of the dolphin group, sometimes attaining a length of thirty
-feet, with large powerful teeth, from ten to thirteen in number, on
-each side of the jaw. It has a high, upstanding fin on the back, like a
-shark. It is very swift in the water and can easily overtake and kill
-one of these latter creature. It is shunned and feared by all the
-denizens of the arctic seas except the Walrus and the great Sperm
-Whale. The Grampus is incredibly voracious, and has been known to
-devour thirteen porpoises and fourteen seals at one meal.
-
-All the smaller animals take refuge in shallow water inshore at the
-approach of a Killer, only to fall a prey there to the native. The
-Killers hunt the whalebone whale, which, fast though it is, cannot make
-good its escape. The pursuers will leap right out of the water and
-crash down upon the head of their victim; or rush upon it and ram it,
-until terrified, stunned and exhausted, the whale drops its jaw, when
-the Killers tear out huge pieces of the tongue. (The tongue of a whale
-is a vast mass of fat, weighing in a full sized animal as much as a
-ton.) Finally, the unwieldly carcase is also despatched, and the
-Grampuses take themselves off, replete. The male Walrus is too active
-and fierce to be beset in this manner, but a female encumbered with a
-calf will often be pursued by the Killer. She takes the young one under
-her flipper and tries to escape; but the aggressor rushes in and butts
-at her. Sometimes he succeeds in claiming this tender mouthful;
-sometimes he is killed by the infuriated mother.
-
-The Sea Unicorn or Narwhal (Monodon monoceros), is a purely arctic
-animal. The curious “horn” is really the left tooth grown to the length
-of six or seven feet. It is only hollow for a certain distance.
-Exteriorly this horn is spirally grooved, to allow presumably for quick
-thrust and withdrawal. The Narwhal often engage in a mock combat among
-themselves with these horns, but use them with fierce and deadly
-precision when engaged in actual warfare.
-
-It were too long to linger here with the creatures of the North, since
-we shall meet them all, and many more, in dealing with the human
-inhabitants of the country. Arctic animals have a fascination all their
-own, and of late years a wonderfully sympathetic and intuitive
-literature has grown up having them almost exclusively for its
-protagonists. Jack London has endeared the powerful, savage, husky dog
-to us for all time, in his “White Fang.”
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IV
-
-THE ESKIMO
-
-
-The inhabitants of the Arctic are the Eskimo, also written Esquimaux,
-Usquemows, called by themselves Innuit (Innuk s. Innooeet p.) or the
-“people.” The word Usquemow is Indian, meaning raw flesh eaters. The
-English and Scotch anglicised it to Eskimo. The name “Husky” as applied
-to the native is merely slang, a corruption of Eskimo perpetrated by
-men whose ears and tongues were untrained to the language—whalers who
-sometimes employed the tribesmen in their hunting, and dubbed them with
-the first jargon name that came handy. It is still used in this sense
-in localities where Europeans are numerous, such as Alaska, and Hudson
-Bay.
-
-Pure blood Indians do not penetrate so far north as the Eskimo
-territories, being denizens of the forest but not of the barrens. The
-Eskimo are a kindly, intelligent people, hardy to a degree. They follow
-the manner of life and the pursuits of primitive man; but when brought
-into contact with the whites and with civilisation, show themselves by
-no means incapable of assimilating a good deal of instruction. They
-have qualities of amiability, hospitality, ingenuity and endurance,
-which all travellers have agreed in extolling; although here and there
-in the records of the voyages of exploration in the nineteenth century
-we also find unfavourable comments passed upon them. They exist in
-small, scattered tribes along the sea coasts, whence they derive the
-bulk of their subsistence. Owing to the establishment of whaling and
-other stations, the geographical areas of the tribes are now more
-circumscribed and confined than they used to be, as each station is a
-centre of trade where most of the necessaries of life can be obtained.
-
-The origin of the Eskimo is a matter of ethnographical conjecture. They
-themselves had no written language until comparatively few years ago,
-and depended upon oral tradition for their history. And even to-day it
-is only the few who have been taught to read and write, so that legend
-still holds sway throughout the greater part of Baffin Land, Cockburn
-Land, and the rest. Their past is lost in obscurity. In the obscurity
-perhaps of that neolithic or “reindeer age” of which their life, even
-now, has so often been cited as a close replica.
-
-That immense span of time in the history of the human race known as the
-Stone Age, falls into five divisions. There is the Palaeolithic period
-(Early, Middle and Late), and the Neolithic period (Transitional and
-Typical). During the last throes of the glacial epoch in Europe, the
-type of human being was that represented by the relic which has come
-down to us known as the Neanderthal skull. But the later Pleistocene
-period saw a greater diversity in the matter of types, and one race in
-particular is represented by a fair number of specimens. They denote a
-good-looking, purely human being. Another race of the same period is
-represented by a single specimen only. It is known as the Chancelade
-Race, and “the skeleton, of comparatively low stature, is deemed to
-show close affinities to the type of the modern Eskimo.” (Dr. Marett.)
-This is exceedingly interesting as giving us some idea of the antiquity
-of the stock, and as showing how glacial conditions in prehistoric
-times in Europe produced a type which lingers on amid the races of the
-modern world in the still existing glacial epoch of the Arctic.
-
-The “Reindeer men” of prehistoric times lived lives no harder in the
-bleak climate and unprogressive conditions of glaciated Europe than
-those of the Eskimo in glaciated America to-day. “The races of Reindeer
-men were in undisturbed possession of western Europe for a period of at
-least ten times as long as the interval between ourselves and the
-beginning of the Christian era.” (H. G. Wells.) If we add these periods
-of time together we may form some estimate of the age of a civilisation
-such as the climatic conditions have produced and proscribed in the
-modern Arctics.
-
-Perhaps it may be said that in one sense the Eskimo have no history.
-They are living the same life, under the same rigorous conditions, in
-the same way now, as their forefathers lived it before them, and as far
-back as human life could be traced in the Arctic earth. It is wonderful
-how faithfully this oral tradition of theirs has been handed down
-through the generations, for the same adventures and incidents and
-stories will be told with little or no alteration by various people of
-widely different tribes, and events that took place centuries ago will
-still be invariably related with circumstantial precision.
-
-The writer well remembers an account given to him one winter’s night by
-an aged hunter, of some stores left by a party of the early explorers.
-It was during a journey along the south coast of Baffin Land, and
-shelter had been sought in the snow house of an ancient Eskimo couple.
-The old man was grandfather of the tribe, and had been a noted hunter
-in his day, and had fought many a battle with the savage elements and
-more savage beasts of the wild. It was after the evening meal. The old
-fellow and his equally old wife had been warmed with some steaming
-coffee liberally sweetened with molasses, and regaled with ship’s
-biscuit. The pipes of both had been filled, and were drawing well.
-Their bronzed, lined faces, lined like the shell of a walnut, shone
-with contentment, they huddled on their sleeping bench and smoked and
-dreamed of the strenuous past. A question or two soon elicited a flood
-of guttural reminiscences. The old hunter pictured himself as a youth
-again, and went over the exploits of his prime, prompted now and again
-by the crone at his side, in a shrewd expectation of further acceptable
-items. Among other things, he told of the various “dumps” or “caches”
-of stores made by the white men who came long ago, remembering exactly
-the localities and the contents of every one. Some had been broken into
-long since by wandering Eskimo; some had been destroyed by bears; some
-remained intact. His memory was as exact and reliable as if he had seen
-the things but a week—instead of a lifetime—before. Perhaps it was an
-echo, all that time afterwards, of the Franklin tragedy.
-
-These primitive Eskimo inhabit the great archipelago which stretches
-polewards from the northern shores of the Canadian continent, from
-Greenland on the east to Alaska and the Aleutian islands on the extreme
-west. There is, too, a settlement of Eskimo beyond Behring Strait. Some
-ethnographers hold them to be of purely American origin with no
-affinities in Asia, however Mongolian they may be in appearance. Dr.
-Rink believes in an Alaskan origin for the Eskimo, as opposed to an
-Asian, but another authority, Dr. Boas, thinks the solution of this
-racial problem might be obtained by means of an archæological research
-on the coast of the Behring Sea.
-
-The original Eskimo stock is now probably extinct. In language and
-physique, many of the present day tribes exhibit traits of racial
-admixture with the Red Indians. This has occurred in such junction
-areas as Labrador and Alaska, and has given rise to the probably quite
-fallacious idea of an Indian origin for the Arctic race. This error
-could not be made in Eskimo lands proper. Those who have lived for long
-years with both Indian and Eskimo, and are intimately acquainted with
-the language, legends, and characteristics of both peoples, hold
-strongly to the opinion that they are entirely distinct. Personally,
-the writer would incline to the belief that the Innooeet are of
-Mongolian stock. He has heard on good authority of a pure Eskimo sailor
-being addressed by a Chinaman in Chinese, under the impression that he
-was speaking to a fellow-countryman. It is conjectured that in the
-remote past some Mongols may have reached the sea coast in the extreme
-east, and have crossed by boat from island to island, and so to the
-Arctics of North America. Increasing there in numbers, they presently
-dispossessed the aboriginals—the “Tooneet”—and drove them to the “back
-of the Arctic beyond.” But of this more when we come to Eskimo legends.
-
-Undoubtedly the Eskimo are linked, if not by blood certainly by custom,
-to the Arctic peoples of Siberia, to the Lapps and Finns of northern
-Europe. In historic times they mixed with the Danes and Norsemen. They
-are not numerically very strong. Forty thousand may possibly total the
-nation, and of those 12,000 are in Greenland, and rather more in
-Alaska, leaving some 13,000 souls scattered along the shores of Baffin
-Land, Melville Peninsula, Boothia, Victoria Island, Banks Island and
-the rest of the bleak, fragmented continent. It is in Baffin Land, in
-Boothia, and Victoria that the pure Eskimo race is found. Elsewhere the
-type is extremely mixed. It is to be deplored, too, that where the
-people have been in contact with vicious and unscrupulous whites,
-traders, sailors, and the rest, the introduction not only of alien
-blood but of the diseases of “civilisation” have here and there
-threatened extinction to whole tribes.
-
-The “Central” tribes of Eskimo (i.e., those tribes exclusive of the
-Greenlanders, the Alaskans, and all the Labradorians save those on the
-northern shore of Hudson’s Strait) number about thirty-two. They have
-been carefully classified, enumerated, and geographically located, by
-the ethnologist, Dr. Boas. Three communities are found along the
-northern shore of Hudson’s Strait (the southern shore of Baffin Land),
-the Sikkoswelangmeoot at King Cape, the Akuliangmeoot at North Bluff,
-and the Quamanangmeoot in the Middle Savage Islands. All along the
-coast of Davis’ Strait are scattered another nine tribes, the chief of
-which are the Nuvungmeoot, in the neighbourhood of Frobisher Bay, and
-the Oqomiut (divided into four territorial groups) all about Cumberland
-Sound. The Lake Netselings Eskimo are a branch of these, called the
-Talikpingmeoot. In the extreme north of Baffin Land the Tunungmeoot are
-found at Eclipse Sound, and the Tununirusirmeoot about Admiralty Inlet.
-
-There is constant intercourse and intermarriage among these scattered
-groups (none of which is numerically large), wherever the tracts of
-land in between them are not wholly impassable. Other groups are more
-or less isolated by long stretches of territory, unnegotiable by any
-means of Eskimo travel. These folk are not only migratory in their
-habits, but great travellers for the sake of travelling, as well. They
-often engage on journeys which occupy months or even years, although
-there is a strong tendency among the old people to return to their
-native spot before the end, and so territorial distinctions are
-maintained.
-
-Even before the advent of Europeans and the trade they brought with
-them, there was a certain amount of barter going on among the Arctic
-folk themselves, occasioning not a little movement. More driftwood
-being found in some localities than in others (chiefly at a place
-called Tudjadjuak), the tribes came from everywhere to barter for it
-with those on the spot. Again, the soapstone or “potstone,” of which
-their lamps and cooking utensils were made, is found in a few places
-only, such as at Kautag, Kikkerton and Quarmaqdjuin; so that the
-natives came long distances to dig or trade for that, too. Pyrites for
-striking fire was also a valuable if local production, and flint for
-arrow head making. On the whole the relationships of the various tribes
-were very friendly, and open hospitality was everywhere observed
-throughout all the regions where communication was fairly open and
-established. Some feuds or tribal reserves obtained where the peoples
-were strange to each other, and hence arose some extraordinary customs
-as to greetings, which looked very much like challenges to single
-combat by the chosen representatives of either group.
-
-There seems to be some evidence that the present day Eskimo were not
-the original inhabitants of these regions at all. There are definite
-traces still remaining of an earlier folk called the Tooneet. Eskimo
-tradition speaks repeatedly of these Tooneet as having been conquered
-by the ancestors of the present race and pushed farther and farther
-north, until they were lost sight of altogether. Some of their words
-have been preserved by the Medicine Men (Angakooeet, the conjurors),
-and the remains of their dwellings and graves were to be seen up to a
-few years ago, the latter still containing skeletons and weapons.
-
-The Tooneet were short, between four and five feet in stature, and very
-broadly built. (On this subject the reader should consult Dr. Rink,
-“Tales and Traditions of the Eskimo.”) The skull was oval, unlike the
-present race, who are round-headed. Their weapons were fashioned of
-stone, but of a different shape to those of to-day. Their skin canoes
-were short and broad instead of the long, narrow kyak in use now. Of
-these aboriginals little further trace or memory remains. The writer
-met a very ancient Eskimo on the south coast of Baffin Land, who
-related that his grandfather had seen two Tooneet on the shores of an
-inland lake. They were getting into their canoes, and would not allow
-the other to come near. They appeared to understand nothing of the
-shouted greeting, but hastily paddled off. The Tooneets were also found
-on the coast of Labrador. The present tribes of the region were
-originally enslaved to them. At Nakrak, their remains are to be seen.
-
-The unmixed Eskimo type of to-day closely resembles the Chinese, with
-an average stature of five feet, lank black hair and small peaked eyes.
-Nansen gives us a very life-like picture of them: “Their faces are as a
-rule round, with broad, outstanding jaws, and are, in the case of the
-women particularly, very fat, the cheeks being especially full. The
-eyes are dark and often set a little obliquely, while the nose is flat,
-narrow above and broad below. The whole face often looks as if it had
-been compressed from the front and forced to make its growth from the
-sides. Among the women, and more especially the children, the face is
-so flat that one could almost lay a ruler across from cheek to cheek
-without touching the nose; indeed, now and again one will see a child
-whose nose really forms a depression in the face rather than the
-reverse. It will be understood from this that many of the people show
-no signs of approaching the European standard of good looks, but it is
-not exactly in this direction that the Eskimo attractions usually lie.
-At the same time there is something kindly, genial and complacent in
-his stubby, dumpy ... features which is quite irresistible. Their hands
-and feet alike are generally small and well shaped.” Elsewhere he adds:
-“One cannot help being comfortable in these people’s society. Their
-innocent, careless ways, their humble contentment with life as it is,
-and their kindness, are very catching, and must clear one’s mind of all
-dissatisfaction and restlessness.” The length of the excerpt will be
-forgiven, since it gives more than a delightful pen picture—an
-inimitable bit of human psychology, that touch of insight which makes
-the whole world kin.
-
-The Eskimo on the southern coasts of Baffin Land are taller than their
-fellows, sometimes attaining a stature of six feet and breadth in
-proportion. The majority of the men are beardless. Their hair, black
-and coarse, is worn either long or short, but is cut square across the
-forehead. It covers the ears, to prevent frostbite, and a band is tied
-round the head to prevent it blowing about too freely in the wind. We
-shall deal with the ladies’ coiffure at greater length in another
-connection.
-
-Each band of Eskimo inhabits some particular spot or tract of the
-coast, and takes its name after the country, or some peculiarity it
-exhibits. For instance, the land at the point of Fox Channel and Hudson
-Strait is called Sikkoswelak, a term which describes the fact that the
-ice just there is seldom stable, owing to the swift local tides. Thus
-the tribe is known to the rest as the Sikkoswelangmeoot or
-“The-People-of-the-Place-which-never-Freezes.” Again, there are the
-Puisortak or the “People-who-live-where-Something-Shoots-up” (a
-blow-hole in a glacier). The tribe is not a very big unit. It consists
-of about ten to twenty families (generally less, and, be it noted, the
-people are polygamists), but the birth-rate is a low one. The deaths
-fairly balance the births, so that their numbers remain more or less
-stable. Were not this the case, the regions they inhabit could never
-support them, for the Eskimo are voracious eaters (naturally,
-considering the climate!) and so far as land animals are concerned, the
-hunting is very scanty for many months of the year.
-
-Apropos of this peace-loving, non-belligerent quality in the Eskimo
-character, some word should be offered in explanation of the fact that
-these people have occasionally shown themselves dangerous to the white
-men, and have murdered a few whalers and traders.
-
-As far as any historical records of them exist at all, it would seem
-that on one occasion only did the Eskimo ever go to war, or make an
-active and successful stand against their enemies. This was many
-centuries ago. The handful of Norsemen from Iceland who originally
-colonised some spots along the coast of southern Greenland, lived
-peaceably enough with the natives they discovered there. At last,
-however, a quarrel broke out, blood was spilt, and the Eskimo, plucking
-up a courage and spirit never since repeated, fought and killed off the
-foreigners. But in America, whenever the Innuit came into contact with
-the Red Indians they simply fled before them ever farther and farther
-into the icy fastnesses of the north. The red men seem to have been
-always particularly savage and inimical to the others. And when in the
-course of time they became possessed of firearms, they pressed this
-overwhelming advantage against the spear and bow-and-arrow people more
-ruthlessly than ever.
-
-The Eskimo believed that it was the white fur trader who had armed the
-Adlât with these “fire-tubes” against him, hence the original hostility
-of these people towards all other white folk. As a matter of fact, the
-servants of the Hudson Bay Company did all they could, in those early
-days, to protect the Eskimo against the Indian, and to bring about an
-understanding between the native races of the great territory they
-exploited. It was, however, this original fear and prejudice which must
-be held accountable for any barbarity white men have met with since at
-the hands of the Eskimo (unless indeed the instance has been one of
-recently and immediately provoked reprisals). For the most part, it
-certainly holds good that the inhabitants of the Arctic north have been
-the least dangerous “savages” explorers have ever met. There are some
-conflicting accounts on this subject in the annals of arctic voyagers;
-but as a very general rule the Eskimo have been found to be a kindly
-and harmless folk. Seldom as they wage war against others, seldom as
-they can be provoked or even terrified into self-defence (except by
-flight), they never fight, in a collective sense, among themselves.
-This is not due to effeminacy or cowardice, for no one could connect
-any such suspicion with the hardy intrepid natives of the most pitiless
-regions of the earth. It is simply that the Eskimo are not made in the
-mould too common to all the other races of mankind—they are not
-fighters. Most people, it has been said, regard war as a reversion to
-primitive instincts. But some historians hold that war—organised war,
-as we understand the term to-day—was not primaeval in its origin. It
-was unknown to early man, and it is unknown to early man’s last
-representatives, such as the Black Fellows of Australia and the Eskimo
-of the Arctics, at the present time. The Eskimo can be doughty enough
-in single combat when necessity or custom require it of him; but
-generally speaking he is the most pacific being on earth.
-
-Where these people come within the sphere of practical British
-influence, they are treated somewhat on the same lines as the North
-American Indians, but without being gathered into Reservations. There
-is a Government Agent in charge of the tribe, and its material needs
-are provided for by the annual supply ship sent along the coast. It is
-generally the Agent, trading or Departmental, who extends the first
-handclasp of welcome to medical man or evangelist who betakes himself
-to the peoples of the Arctic.
-
-There have been, however, few travellers in Baffin Land, excepting, of
-course, the seamen who use its coast. Much of the country is
-unexplored. Probably the only whites who have penetrated it at all have
-been missionaries and explorers.
-
-Thus the very modern and limited story of Baffin Land trade, etc., is
-the only civilised history it has. As for its native history, we might
-refer almost without qualification to any archæological account of the
-fur-clad men of the stone age. The similarity of the Eskimo’s
-implements, their ways of life, their primitive pursuits, their
-domestic and tribal management, to those of the neolithic age, has
-often been pointed out. The only other notices of the Baffin Islanders
-to be found are those which occur in the journals of explorers’
-voyages, such as Captain Parry’s second expedition of 1821, in which we
-get a lively account of the junketings on the ice between the “savages”
-and the crews of the “Fury” and the “Hecla.”
-
-It was during this voyage that the leader fell in with an Eskimo girl
-whose name should be rescued from oblivion. Igloolik added to many
-native graces and accomplishments a bright intelligence and so good an
-idea of hydrography and of the seacoasts in the neighbourhood of the
-“Fury’s” moorings, that the Captain utilised the charts and drawings
-she made for him in the further prosecution of his expedition, finding
-them always reliable and mainly correct. He afterwards called an island
-by her name.
-
-Ten years later, Captain John Ross received the same sort of assistance
-during his second Arctic voyage, from another Eskimo woman named
-Teriksin. She revised and corrected for him the sketches of the
-surrounding coasts furnished by some of the men of the tribe.
-
-The chart which illustrates Chapter XII is just such another as
-Igloolik and Teriksin might have drawn. It was furnished from memory by
-a man called Pitsoolak, and is very fairly correct. The hunters and
-fishers of the Arctic are taught as children to memorise the contours
-of the coast, all landmarks, and every “blaze” of any sort a trail
-might afford. They have no unit of measurement, except the “sleep,”
-i.e., the length of a day’s march and its interval of rest.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER V
-
-THE BUILDING OF THE VILLAGE
-
-
-The Eskimo are a wandering folk, thus their dwellings must of necessity
-be capable of quick erection, demolition and easy transport. The tribe
-lives in tents in the summer, moving from one camp to another as the
-hunters decide; but winter quarters are more permanent, and the snow
-built house—the igloo—takes the place of the sealskin tupik on a more
-lasting foundation. The Eskimo tent is a wholly different affair from
-the Indian wigwam or lodge. It consists of a penthouse shaped framework
-of poles, semi-circular at the back, with overlapping strips or
-curtains of dressed skin for the entrance in front. The whole thing
-carries a covering of skins, firmly and beautifully stitched together.
-The back part of the tent, used as the family sleeping place, is
-covered with skins of the large ground seal—ogjuk—or of the ordinary
-grey seal, with the hair left on in order to ensure some darkness
-during the long, unbroken day of the arctic summer. The heavy hair also
-serves to throw off the rain in wet weather. But the front portion of
-the dwelling has a roofing of the inner membranes of the sealskins,
-pared from the entire pelt when fresh and moist. These membranes are
-first stretched upon frames and dried, prior to being sewn together,
-when they become almost transparent, so that there is plenty of light
-in the rest of the tent. They are so beautifully and so neatly stitched
-as to be practically waterproof, like the fine fishing jackets made of
-dried and split seal gut for the kyakers. The finish of Eskimo
-clothing, fur “blankets” and tent coverings, is always neat and
-workmanlike and gives no ragged, tatterdemalion impression of nomad
-savagery such as might be derived from some Indian’s belongings.
-
-Towards the back of the tent, inside, a board is fixed from side to
-side, and the whole space between this and the walls is filled with a
-deep bed of heather, spread on top with deerskins. This is the sleeping
-place of the family, in the dark half of the dwelling. Additional
-deerskins serve as blankets, and lie about the bed, rolled up, during
-the day. The rest of the furnishing is very simple.
-
-Inside the entrance hang the bags of seal oil used for lighting or
-cooking purposes. Then there are the cooking pots (“kettles,” as they
-are called), deep, oblong boxes of soapstone without a lid. And the
-lamps, also of soapstone, and in shape not unlike a crumb tray, with a
-raised lip and a little shelf at the back for refuse bits of wick.
-These “lamps” are fed with seal oil. The wick consists of dried moss
-and gossypium. This is moulded into pellets; a row of wick balls is set
-on the rim of the lamp and then kneaded down into a line upon it and
-kept carefully trimmed, so that the edge of flame remains clear and
-bright. All the cooking is done over a “lamp” of this description,
-unless over a fire of heather and driftwood out in the open. The Eskimo
-housewife uses a blubber hammer (a stone, or mallet of ivory tusk set
-in a wooden handle), to beat down the seal or whale fat into oil for
-her lamps. Her furs, and her cooking pots, together with her needles,
-and knives and implements for dressing skins, constitute the Eskimo
-woman’s domestic outfit; a training in the clever use of them is the
-Eskimo girl’s education, and the dowry of the Eskimo bride. The tent
-and these impedimenta are portable enough for the wanderings of the
-arctic summer, and it is remarkable what an amazing host and medley of
-belongings can be stowed in the family travelling boat, and unloaded
-from it—a veritable Pandora’s box—at the next bit of summer beach.
-
-The winter locale and the winter dwelling is altogether another story.
-The tribe having chosen the site of a village in some sheltered bay,
-near a frozen lake or stream (or, at any rate, where ice or water can
-be obtained), will return to it year after year, and remain there
-throughout the long dark season, until the time comes round again for
-the summer-exodus. An occasional excursion is undertaken by both men
-and women in search of supplies, but the old folk are left on guard.
-
-The building of this village is quite a work of art, and is begun as
-soon as the snow lies deep enough. Before this happens, the tents have
-been getting very cold to live in, despite the stitching on of several
-layers of dried heather to break the force of the wind and keep all
-snug inside. At last a day comes when by common consent the hunters all
-remain in camp, and join forces with the old men and the boys to build
-the winter dwellings.
-
-Each man plans and builds his own house according to the size of his
-family; but only in his turn, and assisted by the rest of the
-community, to whom he has already given, or is prepared to give, his
-services. The first houses to be erected are those of the Angakooeet,
-the Medicine Men; the chief hunters are the next to be considered, and
-everyone else comes in the order of his estimation in the tribe.
-
-The main considerations the Eskimo has to bear in mind in building his
-snow house are that it will have to be kept in repair, and that it must
-be adequately lighted and warmed. This means labour and oil, so for his
-own sake the dwelling is planned on as small a scale as possible. It
-varies in nothing but in this point of size from all the rest of the
-village.
-
-The hunter having chosen his site, next takes a sealing spear, a long
-twelve-inch knife and a saw, and begins piercing the snow in every
-direction, his object being to find a spot where it is deep, and so
-closely packed and hardened by the wind that it can be cut out into
-great blocks for building. Otherwise his “bricks” would be too brittle
-or too friable for the purpose. Should no such patch lie near at hand,
-the builder calls all hands, and together they start trampling and
-packing down the snow with their feet, while the old men, the women and
-boys constantly bring up fresh supplies and throw it in to be stamped
-firm. Having thus prepared what he considers sufficient material for
-his purpose, the good man commences to saw out huge rectangular blocks
-of this solidified snow mass, each one of which taxes his utmost
-strength to lift. He begins his house by building a ring of them, a
-larger or smaller ring as the case may be, fitted and jointed together
-with the utmost nicety by means of his knife. A second tier is added to
-this ring, the builder working from the inside and the blocks being
-brought up by his assistants. As soon as this is “well and truly laid,”
-he trims the upper surface to a slope, and continues building, but in a
-spiral now and slightly sloping inwards, until he has reached the top
-of what has grown to be a dome roof. A key block is deftly fitted in to
-complete and close it, and the shell of the dwelling is complete.
-
-A semicircular opening in the side is next cut out for the doorway, and
-then the builder turns his attention to the sleeping bench—the
-principal feature of the Eskimo igloo. He builds a line of blocks from
-side to side, facing the opening, up to the height of a man’s legs. The
-space between this and the walls is filled with broken snow like
-rubble, which is trampled down until brought to the necessary level, so
-as to form a solid bench of snow right across the building.
-
-Then side pieces are built out, to form solid shelves for the lamps and
-family utensils and to serve generally as a larder and storage place
-for oil and blubber; so that, by the time all is done there is little
-of the original floor space left.
-
-The next step is the porch or sukso, another little domed erection much
-like the main igloo, built in front of the entrance and intended, first
-to break the force of the wind and to keep the larger place warm, and
-secondly as a store house for surplus meat and blubber, for the dogs’
-harness, whips, sealing lines, and anything the latter and the wolves
-might find eatable. (Eskimo dogs, be it remarked, find nothing
-uneatable save sticks and stones). As an entrance or exit for the
-sukso, a further passage is built, like a little tunnel; again as
-protection from the arctic wind.
-
-The finishing touch is the window. Light is a necessity, but the Eskimo
-is scarcely particular about ventilation. The less he gets of that the
-more successful his architecture seems to be. A square opening is cut
-high up in the dome of the igloo, facing the sleeping bench. It is then
-glazed after the fashion of the Arctics. The builder sets off for the
-nearest sheet of fresh water ice, and with the butt end of his sealing
-spear shivers out a good thick pane of it. This he places over the hole
-in the roof, packing its edges round with half melted snow, and pouring
-water over the packing. In two minutes, everything is frozen airtight
-and solid, and a window of flawless ice lets the illumination of the
-northern night into the pure and icy chamber of the newly made house.
-Failing a window of ice, one is made of strips of dried seal intestine
-(a thin, translucent material, not unlike oiled silk), stitched
-together with fine deer sinew. The seams are parallel, and as neatly
-executed as if by machine working on the smallest stitch. The fabric is
-stretched over the opening and pegged down at the corners, and
-congealed into its place by half melted snow. A small hole is cut in
-the dome for ventilation, and a snow block provided to stop it up again
-when necessary.
-
-Finally, the interior has to be glazed. While the householder himself
-has been busy more or less within the building, on the outside the old
-men and the children and the women have been set the task of packing
-every joint and crevice in the snow masonry with loose snow, so as to
-make it absolutely wind tight. Now comes the moment when the doorways,
-too, are closed and every entrance blocked. Two lamps, well trimmed and
-well supplied with oil, have been carefully lit and left burning
-inside, much as we in this country leave a sulphur candle in a room to
-be fumigated after infectious illness, and seal up the door. As the
-lamps burn slowly away, the temperature rises and all the surface of
-the snow is slightly melted. As the lamps die out the temperature falls
-again, and the surface freezes to glass-like smoothness. Every asperity
-of the sawn blocks of snow is annealed, and the dwelling is as proof
-against draught as the inside of a bottle. Water, too, is thrown on the
-floor, to make it smooth as marble and as durable as cement.
-
-The writer has dwelt thus at length upon the building of the Eskimo’s
-winter quarters, since there is something almost like a fairy tale in
-this fantastic yet ingenious and practical use of snow and ice. If
-masters of taste have always insisted upon the principles in
-architecture that design should be in keeping with site and
-surroundings, and material should be indigenous to the locality, surely
-the houses that these hardy children of the frozen North build for
-themselves are by no means wanting in true artistry.
-
-These snow houses do not take very long to construct. An Eskimo can
-build an igloo large enough to house about six people in a few hours,
-given some assistance. It would be imagined that no great degree of
-comfort could be expected within a dwelling where a thaw of the roof
-and walls begins as soon as the temperature rises above freezing point.
-But warmth is a matter of degree in the Arctic, and shelter from the
-bitterness of the wind alone is almost warmth. The stillness of the air
-inside, the greatly lessened intensity of cold, and the local if foul
-warmth over the lamps and cooking pots, all make for comfort as the
-native understands it.
-
-In some parts of the country the natives line the dome and walls of
-their houses with cleverly stretched skins, and between them and the
-snow walls the intervening space acts as a regulator against the
-interior warmth, so that excessive thaw is checked, or its effects are
-prevented from damping the family circle below.
-
-Lest the foregoing account of the white and frozen village should
-convey too dazzling an idea of such a settlement, it should be
-remembered that the snow all round and about is trampled up, and
-incredibly defiled by all the refuse of a community who have no ideas
-at all about sanitation and seemly surroundings. Hence there is an
-appearance of dirt and squalor wherever the Eskimo encamp, and these
-little congeries of human beings contrive quite effectually to blot and
-mar the pure immensity of the snow-white northern landscape.
-
-The Igloovegak once finished, it remains to do the furnishing. This is
-essentially the women’s work. Heather is lavishly spread over the
-sleeping bench, and covered again with the heavy winter skins of deer.
-The rolled-up fur rugs (or “blankets”) of the family are ranged round
-the walls. Two of the soapstone lamps are placed on stands at each end
-of the sleeping bench, and a rough framework of wood and deer thongs
-arranged above them by way of a rack for drying clothes. Stone cooking
-pots may be suspended over the lamps when required, and a store of
-blubber and meat is kept handy on the snow benches behind the lamps.
-
-The rest of the family belongings are stowed away in the porch, and the
-house is ready for occupation.
-
-There is another description of snow dwelling used by the Eskimo called
-a Sinniktâkvik, an acquired sleeping place. This is merely a temporary
-affair, a hastily built igloo sufficient to house a travelling party
-for the space of a “sleep,” having no porch or window, and only
-intended to be abandoned next day.
-
-It is interesting to note that the remains of the dwellings of the
-Tooneet can be distinguished by the fact of their circular floors
-having been laid down with rough stones, unlike the modern igloo, which
-leaves little or nothing to mark its site by the time it has all melted
-away in summer. The sleeping bench in the Tooneet house was narrower
-than the present day Eskimo’s, showing that the earlier people were of
-shorter stature.
-
-The family continue to inhabit the winter igloo until the spring thaw
-comes, and the roof falls in. Then, for a week or two, skins are
-stretched over the hole to keep the storms from beating in; but this is
-only a temporary measure. By the time the milder weather really sets
-in, and the trickle of water can be heard everywhere, and the
-tunnelling, too, of the lemming under the sleeping bench, the tupik has
-to be in readiness. It has been stored away under a heap of stones
-during the winter, but with the advent of the ducks it is brought forth
-and erected once more.
-
-These Eskimo settlements are not built according to plan. Each man
-chooses a site for his own igloo, generally in the shelter of some
-rock, or where there is a good supply of hard packed snow. The
-dwellings are not very scattered, however, but grouped fairly closely
-together, for the double purpose of sociability and common defence
-against attack by dogs, wolves, or bears. The true Eskimo village
-boasts of no common room or general meeting house such as may be in use
-among some of the tribes in Alaska and elsewhere, where few native
-customs survive unchanged. Nor is the log or sod hut ever seen in the
-regions where Eskimo life is still lived as it used to be before
-Europeans set foot in the polar wilds.
-
-It is noteworthy that, when an Eskimo tribe moves to another locality,
-the old igloos are never destroyed. In the barrens, the law of
-hospitality is universally observed, and such of these buildings as may
-survive the springtime thaw, might serve for shelter at any time to
-travellers on journey. Those that are fairly intact when the tribe
-moves away are merely blocked up; but those which have become unsafe
-have the roof knocked in. The writer has frequently come across these
-deserted villages in the course of his journeys, and had occasion to
-avail himself of the shelter thus offered. It is a weird and desolate
-sight—a collection of derelict igloos—some gaping open, others closed;
-but no smoke or steam escaping from their little domes. And, over all,
-the pall of the frozen silence of the Arctic.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VI
-
-THE SEALING GROUNDS
-
-
-The day’s work in an Eskimo village (i.e., permanent winter quarters),
-is full and varied, and quite regular. It is a busy life they lead,
-both men and women, marked by all sorts of skilled activities; by
-intervals of neighbourly recreation and gossip; by the excitement and
-stir of the hunters’ return from sealing or bear hunting; and by
-wonderfully cheery, cosy, hospitable orgies of eating in the evening,
-when everyone is getting dry and warm and replete for the night.
-
-The hunters start out early in the morning, after a hasty meal of raw
-flesh and a drink of water, accompanied by their sons and the dogs,
-four or five in number, harnessed to a light sled loaded with lines and
-harpoons, or whatever implements may be needed for the proposed chase.
-The team starts out in a fine tear, urged by shouting and the cracking
-of whips, and off they all race, men and dogs together, to the sealing
-grounds out on the frozen sea, or inland for deer. The stars serve as a
-compass, or in thick weather the wind will be sufficient guide.
-
-No food is borne on the sled, for the hunter depends upon himself for
-his dinner. The duty of the boys is to watch the sled, to mind the
-dogs, and see they do not fight or stampede, to study the conditions of
-the ice, the signs of the weather, the habits of animals, to note their
-calls and movements and how to imitate them, to take careful notice of
-the topography of the country and make mental drawings of it to serve
-as charts and maps, to read the stars, and, generally to endeavour to
-become skilled and successful hunters themselves.
-
-They arrive at the sealing ground as the winter day breaks, and
-immediately start the search for a seal hole; for upon the finding of
-this depends the comfort and sustenance of the whole family for days to
-come, and the succour of the families of anybody else who may not be in
-luck, but who may return home, cheery as ever, but empty handed.
-
-All around as far as the eye can see is a vast, white expanse, utterly
-featureless and monotonous save for an occasional iceberg or a ridge of
-hummocky ice. Behind is the white line of the broken coast; ahead is a
-dark mist, marking the floe edge and the open sea; and above all, the
-twilight sky, darker than the drear white world, of the Arctic winter.
-To a European, the effect of such a scene is crushing in its
-melancholic immensity, its frozen immobility and silence. Not so to the
-native. He remains irrepressibly cheerful, his whole soul preoccupied
-with the necessities of his larder, buoyed up with the hope and the
-tireless patience of the sealer. He goes searching for his blow hole.
-The slight indication for which his practised eye is scanning every
-foot of the ice is a faintly rounded bump with a small opening in it no
-bigger than a shilling. As soon as he catches sight of one of these he
-is reassured, and prepares to wait—quite indefinitely, and perfectly
-still—for what must presently happen.
-
-The seal is a warm-blooded creature, whose need of air to breathe is
-urgent and frequent. As soon as the sea begins to freeze, the animal
-takes precautions against being imprisoned and drowned under the ice.
-It makes a series of breathing holes over the whole area of its feeding
-ground below. If one or another of these freezes over again, there are
-the rest; or if an enemy is encountered at one hole, it can have
-recourse to another. The seal comes methodically after feeding to each
-blow hole in turn, and keeps it open by scratching away any newly
-formed ice threatening to close it up. It puts its nose to the opening
-and breathes long, deeply, and luxuriously, before diving once more.
-
-The hunter knows every move in the game.
-
-Having discovered a seal hole, he provides himself with a block of snow
-to sit upon, and prepares for a lengthy wait. He takes up his patient
-station facing the wind (for the seal has the keenest scent, and the
-Eskimo is, to say the least of it, somewhat smelly), thrusts his feet
-and legs into a deerskin bag, tucks his hands into the sleeves of his
-jacket, lays his spear across his knees, and watches—it may be for
-hours—motionless as a rock, for sound travels under the ice and the
-prey must not be warned. A sealer will wait all day and all night, if
-need be, at the blow hole. If he should fall asleep, he runs the risk
-of being maimed for life with frostbite.
-
-Presently he hears the expected scratching, and the scraping of the
-paws of a seal coming up to breathe. Silently he prepares for action.
-Now is the critical time. First, there comes the expulsion of the foul
-air long pent in the animal’s lungs; but not yet dare the watcher make
-the slightest sign. The seal withdraws its head and listens intently
-for a possible foe. Reassured after a few moments, it again approaches
-the hole with the little dome of snow and, putting its head well up,
-takes a long, reviving breath. This is the hunter’s moment. His hand
-slips to his spear (his fur garments making no sound), grips it, and
-poises it with unerring aim. With one swift downward thrust, the weapon
-is through the blow hole and its barb buried deep in the neck of the
-seal. When the eye is true and quick the stroke is seldom missed. The
-animal immediately dives, taking out the barb and line. The Eskimo seal
-spear has a movable head or barb, which is attached to the shaft in
-such a way that it becomes detached from it the moment an animal is
-struck, and remains firmly embedded in the flesh with the long line of
-white whale hide attached, while the spear itself floats on the water
-or falls on the ice as the case may be. The hunter instantly recovers
-this shaft, and now the butt comes into play. The hole is quickly
-enlarged and the prey hauled up and killed, there on the ice, with one
-quick stroke.
-
-It is but the work of a few minutes for the dog team (which had been
-driven away back from the hole as soon as it was discovered), to come
-racing up. A shout summons every other hunter within sight, and quicker
-than it takes to tell, there is a concourse of fur-clad figures, the
-seal is cut open, and a rib, dripping with the fresh, hot blood, is
-presented to each by way of an invigorating snack. The carcase is soon
-skewered together again by means of the long ivory pins carried by the
-hunter, and loaded on to the sled, when the successful “outfit,”
-bidding a cheery adieu to the others, strikes off then and there for
-home, rejoicing in the thought of fresh supplies of meat and blubber,
-and another skin added to the family stores.
-
-When the sealing season fully sets in, sealing camps are formed far out
-on the ice at sea, over the sealing grounds, and thither the younger
-half of the entire Eskimo community resorts for a month or more. A new,
-roughly fashioned, temporary village quickly springs up, and all the
-usual household goods are installed in readiness for the season’s work
-on the spot. The camp igloos are much smaller and less ambitious
-dwellings than those on shore, their sole object being to provide a few
-weeks’ shelter. There is none of the home life of the permanent
-village. The men and boys are away all day long, and the women spend
-all their time preparing and drying the skins and keeping the cooking
-pot going. Water is obtained either from the snow lying deep on the
-surface of the ice, or from ice from the nearest berg. From early
-morning till late at night the camp resounds with the crack of whips,
-the shouts of the dog-team drivers, the gruff voices of men and the
-shrill voices of boys, as they drive hither and thither, quartering the
-expanse of the sealing grounds in search of the blow holes. Every foot
-of the way is closely scanned. Suddenly a deep “Ugh!” from the hunter
-announces the saucer-like depression in the snow which tells him that a
-seal cavern is beneath.
-
-Here and there a solitary sportsman with but one dog on a long line
-sets out on his own, over the sealing ground. He trudges observantly
-along, urging the dog to ferret about and pick up the scent of the
-quarry beneath the snow. “White Fang,” nothing loth, sets all his
-sharp, trained wits to work, and presently starts snuffling and
-scratching, like any terrier at a rat hole, and the hunter knows he has
-come upon his prey.
-
-To understand the activities of the sealing camp it is necessary to
-know something of the habits of the seal in the breeding season. For
-some time before the baby creature is born, for instance, the mother
-has been preparing a house for it. She does not give birth in the water
-nor on the surface of the snow, for the obvious reasons of the cold and
-of the possible presence of enemies. She makes a hole in the sea ice
-big enough for her to get through, and proceeds to scrabble out an airy
-cavern in the deep layer of snow above, leaving a sort of shelf or
-flooring of clear ice upon which she can lie in safety and bring her
-young to birth. This place is—comparatively—warm, dry, and even cosy.
-It is within immediate reach of the hole through which she can dive
-back into the water at a moment’s alarm, and it is almost completely
-hidden from above. The baby is left in this cavern while the mother
-seeks food, and it lives there until, after a series of short
-educational excursions in the water, it has learnt to hunt for itself,
-and its lungs have accustomed themselves to the conditions of the adult
-seal’s existence.
-
-Frequently indeed the baby gets drowned! The mother may have heard some
-noise above which has alarmed her. Fearing danger, she has thrust her
-head up through the diving hole, caught hold of the young one, and
-hastily retreated with it to a depth unsuitable for its tender lungs,
-with a sad and fatal result.
-
-The Eskimo sealer knows all this natural history as he knows that of
-every other denizen of the Arctic, and founds upon it his methods in
-hunting.
-
-Directly he has detected the locality of a seal’s nursing cavern under
-his feet, either by the presence of a slight depression in the snow, or
-by the pointing of the dog, he arms himself with a nixie, or hook on
-the end of a long shaft, and gathering himself together makes a
-tremendous jump into the air, coming down with all his weight and force
-upon the spot. He jumps again and again, until at last the snow caves
-in and blocks the hole below, cutting off the baby seal’s retreat into
-the sea beneath. Then he prods and probes among the débris of the
-cavern for the imprisoned creature, locates it, hooks it out, and kills
-it with one blow on the head. After that, there is the mother to be
-caught. She is probably lurking under the ice nearby. So, before he
-kills the little one, the hunter ties his sealing line to one of its
-flippers and pushes it through the diving hole into the water. The
-mother at once tries to come to its rescue, only to encounter her own
-devoted death. She, too, is hooked, dragged out, and despatched.
-
-The seal has other enemies to contend with besides man. The bear has a
-keen scent, a heavy paw, a huge appetite, and a peculiar relish for her
-young. He, too, wanders out on the sealing grounds at the proper
-season, and having found a cavern, sets his two huge forepaws on the
-snow and, with one mighty push, breaks it all in. He easily hooks the
-helpless little creature beneath, and devours it with ursine relish.
-
-Or it may be that an arctic fox decides to spend a day seal hunting. He
-glides over the snow, an almost invisible shape, like nothing so much
-as a white wraith of the desolation around. His scent having guided him
-to a likely spot, and being unable, like the bear, to do his
-housebreaking by mere brute force, he adopts a peculiarly wicked plan
-of his own. Planting all four feet together pivot-fashion, he spins
-himself round and round, his claws boring a way through the snow, until
-he corkscrews his unwelcome presence into the seal’s retreat. The baby,
-again, falls a helpless victim.
-
-This seal hunting of the tribesmen, far out at sea in the camp on the
-ice, is not without its dangers, as the following tale will show.
-
-For several weeks all had gone prosperously with the sealers. The
-weather had been good, and the young seals plentiful. Loaded sleds had
-been continually going to and fro between the winter village on shore
-and the village on the ice, bearing meat and skins to the old folk at
-home. Contentment and jollity reigned, for had not the Conjurors
-guaranteed prosperity and good luck, and were their prophecies not
-amply fulfilled?
-
-But, one day, the sky became overcast. Hour after hour it grew more
-heavily banked with forbidding cloud, whilst from seaward came a low
-roar, the presage of an arctic storm. The sealers hastily retreated to
-their dwellings, and blocked up their doors, and prepared to wait.
-Evening drew nigh, and the tempest rose. An occasional quiver of the
-icy floor told of the pounding of heavy breakers at the floe edge, and
-a portentous shiver now and again spoke of masses of it being broken
-away.
-
-With the indifference which comes of familiarity with danger, these
-hardy northern folk stayed out there in camp, on the very edge as it
-were of death; and as the night drew on, merely rolled themselves in
-their fur blankets and went to sleep, confident that the morning would
-see an abatement in the storm. Nevertheless, it went on increasing and
-grew more and more violent. The shivering dogs scratched holes for
-themselves in the snow on the lee side of the igloos, and buried
-themselves as deeply as they could. At length the Eskimo instinct of
-peril was aroused, and an intuitive sense of the full extent of the
-catastrophe at hand (a sense not developed to any marked degree among
-civilised peoples), roused the entire camp.
-
-It began when a woman and her husband waked suddenly, feeling that all
-was not well. They looked round the igloo, yet could detect nothing
-amiss. Its other occupants slept soundly. There was the thud and the
-roar of the wild hurricane without, but all seemed snug within.
-
-And yet—what was that? Even as the goodwife watched and waited, there
-came another of those strange quiverings in the ice, and the cooking
-pot suspended over the lamp began to swing. The awful thing told its
-own tale! The ice on which the camp was built was breaking up beneath
-it, and every soul was faced with imminent and deadly peril. The sea
-was fathoms deep below; the land a long distance away! Darkness and the
-savage uproar without made chaos of the arctic night.
-
-Then indeed the ice gave way, and in a moment became nothing but a
-pounding, grinding mass of detatched fragments, on which the wrecked
-camp tossed. The sealers, roughly awakened, smashed down their doors,
-or with knife and spear cut a way out of their igloos as best they
-might, and got clear of them, followed by the women and children. With
-the strange but unerring instinct of primitive man, they headed, even
-in that tumult and pitchy darkness, for the unseen land; and then began
-a perilous race with death and the spirits of the storm.
-
-They had to spring from floe to floe, following each other, encouraging
-and helping the women, finding a way where from moment to moment there
-might be none, risking everything at every leap.
-
-Among those in the crowd was Kownak, a young hunter, and his new made
-wife. The girl was only then recovering from a recent sickness, and her
-strength completely failed her. The two started, indeed, on their
-ghastly journey like the rest; but before half the distance to safety
-was accomplished the young wife—wet, terrified, and weak—sank down
-exhausted and beaten on the bitter ice with a cry of despair. Kownak
-lifted her up and bore her on in his arms. But the rocking of the ice
-flung them both into the sea time and again, despite his utmost
-endeavour. Once he managed to grip the edge of the floe, whilst the
-girl scrambled back on to it again over his shoulders. He stripped off
-his coat to wrap it round her in the frantic effort to keep her from
-freezing, and tried again to lift and carry her. But it was an
-impossible feat on the tossing, glassy ice. She struggled to rise and
-stagger on, but could endure no more and sank down again, unconscious,
-to be frozen to death within another minute.
-
-Kownak could not tear himself from the body until it had become nothing
-but an indistinguishable mass, one with the ice. Only then did he
-remember his own desperate plight, and make a final effort to save
-himself. After incredible exertions and hairbreadth escapes, at last he
-reached the shore, black with frostbite, and joined the surviving
-remnant of the sealing camp. The merest handful of the people had
-outlived that terrible night.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VII
-
-WOMANHOOD IN THE ARCTICS.
-
-
-In the meantime, the women, left in the village on shore, have been far
-from idle. As soon as the husband has gone off for the day the wife
-sets about her domestic affairs. First, she rolls up the bedding and
-tidies the sleeping bench. The next job is to sweep the hoar-frost from
-the window and the cupola, to prevent the dripping of any moisture, and
-then to sweep up the floor—littered, likely enough, with the remains of
-a good feed overnight. These duties are performed with a brush made of
-the outspread wings of a duck or raven; it might almost be called a
-double-bladed brush. The backs are sewn together and the upper bones
-form the handle. Such a contrivance is a very handy affair altogether,
-and will last quite a long time.
-
-The next task is to prepare a quantity of blubber for oil. This is
-pulped with a bone hammer or koutak, and the fuel so obtained is
-suspended over the shallow lamps in such a way as to dip into them and
-keep them supplied. New wick is fashioned from dried moss and cotton
-plant trimmed upon the lamps. Next comes the stew for supper. The
-Eskimos have only one way of cooking meat, and that is stewing it in
-the stone “kettles” already described. These are partly filled with sea
-water for the sake of the salt, a quantity of seal’s blood is added,
-and then comes the meat. The whole thing hangs simmering over the lamps
-all day, and by the time the men come back at night a reeking hot meal
-is ready, rich, nourishing, and as tender as a sharp-set hunter could
-desire.
-
-Water is the next consideration. The Eskimo housewife hauls it in skin
-buckets from the nearest stream, bailing it up through a hole in the
-ice; or, failing that, she brings in the ice itself, or snow, and sets
-it to melt over a spare lamp. These people are thirsty souls, and water
-is hard to come by in the winter. Every drop that can be obtained is
-used for drinking or cooking, so that washing (except the hands and
-face), is dispensed with perforce of arctic circumstance. Fresh water
-ice melts more quickly than beaten snow, and it is an interesting fact
-that an iron or tin pot used for melting the former will last much
-longer than for melting snow. The latter process causes it to become
-quickly pitted with spots of rust and perforated. Aluminium vessels
-last the longest. In the old days—i.e., prior to the establishments of
-trading posts—the Eskimos had no utensils of any sort except those of
-native manufacture from bone, or stone, or ivory. Nowadays they have
-steel-tipped spears, iron nails, and tinware for cooking purposes.
-
-Perhaps the next most important employment of the feminine portion of
-the community is the preparation of skins, the softening of leather,
-and the finer animal tissues, the washing, drying, and stretching of
-gut, and the manufacture of the marvellously fine sinew used for sewing
-and stitchery. All this includes the making of tents and clothing. The
-old women help the housewives as far as they are able, and the girls
-watch and learn, with a view to rendering themselves eligible in the
-eyes of the young men as accomplished brides-to-be. The women are
-perpetually employed chewing the edges of skins and leathers to make
-them pliable and soft for sewing. This process tends to wear down the
-teeth to very unsightly stumps.
-
-The heavy work is done by the hale and hearty, who leave only the
-lighter tasks, such as the tending of the lamps and the minding of the
-house, to the older folk. Womanlike all the world over, the crones love
-to get together and indulge in unlimited gossip. All the women, indeed,
-pay a constant round of visits, and gathering, now here, now there, sit
-about smiling and gossiping, as is their wont from the tropics to the
-pole.
-
-The Eskimo are a genial, jovial, peaceable people, among whom
-quarrelling is a crime, and he or she who disturbs the general peace is
-a villain of the deepest dye. So, whatever else comes of all the
-gossip, it is not—in an Eskimo village—malevolence, backbiting and
-spite. They talk—these fur-clad, hard-working women—of their last
-year’s journeyings, who and what they saw and heard, of their trials
-and vexations, of their children and relations and husbands—each one’s
-contribution to the conversation being punctuated by a chorus of “Ah,
-Ah’s,” “Elarle! Elarle!” (Indeed! Yes!) from the rest.
-
-Suddenly, however, just when their enjoyment may be at its height, the
-children’s cry of “Kumokse! Kumokse! Netsérkpok!”—(A sled, a sled! He’s
-got a seal!) breaks up the gathering in excited confusion. There is a
-rush, each wife to her own home. Cries of joy and anticipation fill the
-air, and the whole village is stirred with cheerful and prosperous
-bustle. The hunters are returning, and fresh supplies are at hand. Very
-soon the cracking of the dog whips is heard, shouts of command, barks
-and howls; and the teams appear, scrambling over the sigjak (the broken
-ice along the shore), with their welcome loads. Quickly the harness is
-thrown off and safely bestowed, the lines and everything eatable being
-carried into the sukso; the dogs are fed and quieted, and curl round
-and go to sleep in the snow.
-
-Then comes the evening meal. The stewpot is taken from the slings and
-set in front of the mistress of the igloo. The sturdy men and children
-crowd round her and each one is served with a generous piece of
-sealmeat. They hold it in their hands to eat. Each bronzed or
-wind-blackened face glows with enjoyment and contentment in the homely
-lamplight, and an atmosphere of unfeigned goodwill and cheer dominates
-the little group. The hungry folk whose husbands and fathers have not
-been successful all day simply distribute themselves through the
-village, and share the food of the lucky. The captor of to-day may
-return empty handed to-morrow, when he may look for hospitality to his
-guests of to-night.
-
-As soon as the meal in the pot is finished, the soup is poured out into
-a drinking bowl and handed round, each one taking a good pull in turn.
-The air soon reeks—the tight-packed assemblage of unwashed humanity,
-the stench of seal oil and blubber, the strong odours from the pot and
-the exhalations of garments spread out on the racks to dry, all
-contribute to the malodorous atmosphere. But what of that to those
-accustomed to nothing else, to whom the whole means warmth and plenty
-and the nearness of his own, in the frozen immensity of the awful
-arctic world without?
-
-As soon as the meal is done the day’s catch of seals is cut up. Each
-animal is placed on its back on the floor, opened and dismembered, and
-pieces of the meat and blubber are given to the needy. Open hospitality
-is the law of the land in the Arctics. Travellers, whether native or
-European, are always sure of welcome and shelter on reaching an Eskimo
-village. On these occasions the stranger is always the first to be
-served from the generous family stew.
-
-This sanguinary and odoriferous business being despatched, and the
-neighbours having taken themselves off, the door is fixed for the
-night—the door being a slab of snow cut to fit the main entrance to the
-igloo, and set on one side during the day. The lamps are trimmed to a
-low flame, wet clothes are spread on the drying frames above them, and
-each member of the family rolls up in a fur blanket on the sleeping
-bench and so goes to bed. Occasionally the mother wakes up, to trim the
-lamps and turn the clothes during the night. She will be the first to
-wake and rise in the morning, since it is part of the woman’s work
-“which is never done,” to rub and soften the leathern clothing of her
-good man and the boys, which had hardened in drying while they slept.
-
-Before the advent of the white man and his methods, the Eskimo used to
-start a fire by means of “firesticks.” The writer has seen this done
-repeatedly at the present day. An oblong piece of wood with a
-depression made in it to hold the tinder (a mixture of dried moss and
-cotton plant), receives the spindle. Another small piece of wood,
-placed on top of the latter, is held in position by the teeth and
-pressed down firmly upon it. The spindle is made to rotate rapidly by
-means of a rough bow until a spark, caused by the friction, starts up
-in the tinder. This is gently blown to a flame, and the fire is
-kindled. Nowadays, steel, or pieces of iron, are used in place of the
-driftwood board and spindle, especially on hunting expeditions; for
-although matches have found their way into the Eskimo igloo, they are
-costly, and apt to get damp.
-
-There seems to be a happy sort of sex equality among these people, or
-perhaps it should rather be said that a mutually agreeable division of
-equally essential labours cause the men and women to live more on a
-common footing than they seem to do among many other uncivilised folk.
-Old women, widows, and orphan girls, never want for protection and
-sustenance, so long as the rest can shelter and support them. The
-Eskimo are a very improvident people, never taking thought for the
-hungry morrow when they can feast to-day; but so long as the good
-things last, so long as they are to be had, the old and helpless of
-both sexes are never neglected. If a time should come when there arises
-a question of superfluous mouths to fill, the old people go into a sort
-of voluntary retreat in their own houses, and willingly die the death
-of starvation. More will be said on this subject elsewhere.
-
-On one dreadful occasion an Eskimo woman was betrayed by force of
-circumstances into an act of cannibalism. This woman was a tall,
-commanding figure from the south coast, with a grave, intelligent face.
-She was an excellent huntress, equally at home with gun or spear. She
-could wield her needle, too, and together with her husband, was a
-first-rate worker and much respected by all the tribe.
-
-A party of women, including herself and her baby, were travelling to a
-trading station. Their sled was well provisioned and their dogs in good
-condition, and the route lay over mountains and valleys, and across all
-the intervening fiords and bays. Soon after they started things began
-to go wrong. The weather changed and a wind got up, bearing snow. Storm
-after storm swept the country, through which the travellers could
-scarcely force their way. The dogs sank to their shoulders in the deep
-drift, and at last could make no further progress at all. The little
-expedition called a halt. They built a sleeping place and prepared to
-wait till the violence of the weather abated. But, as day after day
-went howling by, each as impossible as the last, the stock of rations
-became exhausted, and the whole party reached the verge of starvation.
-
-The Eskimo woman from the south fell ill, in consequence of the
-hardships and privations, and lost consciousness. While she happened to
-be in this state, a council was held by the others of the party, who
-decided to keep life going by killing and eating the child. This was
-accordingly done, and as soon as she could be partially roused, a
-portion was given to the famished mother. Not knowing what it was she
-did, she ate the meat—and survived. Some time afterwards the forlorn
-band was rescued by some hunters and taken to their camp, and only then
-the woman learnt the truth about her supposedly dead baby. Years after
-the horrible thing occurred the writer met her and had the story from
-her own lips.
-
-Women and their adventures figure largely in Eskimo folk tales. One of
-them might almost point to a feminist movement in the Arctics! Two
-brides, it is narrated, ran away from their homes before their very
-first children ever saw the light. After awhile the fathers went in
-search of their lost daughters. When the girls found they were
-discovered they wept bitterly, and declared themselves most unwilling
-to return to their husbands. The fathers, however, were quite relieved
-to find them comfortably off where they were, and having stayed a
-couple of “sleeps” in their daughters’ house, returned home without the
-brides. When they got back to the tribe they had this amazing thing to
-tell—that two women without the company of any men, lived happily all
-by themselves, and were never in want!
-
-There is a charming little story of a lonely woman who owned a bear
-cub, and loved it and brought it up like a child and called it her son.
-The bear repaid her devotion, and supported her by his prowess in
-hunting so well that the rest of the villagers grew jealous and planned
-to kill him. So, conscious of their evil designs, he departed, almost
-as much to the grief of the children of the village as to that of his
-“mother.” He never ceased, however, to repay her love, and continued
-out on the ice floes to catch seals for her support.
-
-The gruesome story of the murderess Toodlânak has never hitherto—so far
-as the writer can ascertain—been included in any ethnologist’s
-collection of the Eskimo legends.
-
-It is narrated by the Ancient Ones that there lived this Toodlânak, who
-was an evil spirit in female disguise. She had a large house
-(igloovegak) built by the side of the route used by hunters going
-inland after deer. It was far up country, many days’ journey either
-from the sea or from the pastures of the interior. The house was large
-and comfortable, and Toodlânak had a reputation for hospitality. She
-loved to entertain any who passed that way and to give them food and
-shelter for the night. She allotted to them the best rugs and the most
-comfortable part of the sleeping bench. Presently, however, it began to
-be noticed that few if any of these hunters returned. At last the
-brother of one of these inexplicably missing men determined to look
-into things. He started out with a companion, and in due course both
-reached the half-way house. Out came Toodlânak, as usual, all smiles
-and amiability, inviting them to enter and refresh and rest themselves
-there for the night. They did so, but the suspicious young man kept his
-wits about him, and never relaxed a sharp look-out on his hostess. He
-had a notion that she knifed her guests in their slumber.
-
-Unknown to Toodlânak, he secreted a flat stone within the bosom of his
-tunic (the netseak), and, rolling himself in his blanket, lay flat on
-his back apparently in deep sleep. His hostess had also retired to
-rest, and seemed also quite dead to the world. But, about midnight, he
-saw her rise by the dim light of the lamp, and creep over to his
-companion where he also lay asleep on the bench. The movement betrayed
-the fact that the awful creature had a knife-like tail with which she
-struck her victim through the chest and killed him. She then crept
-stealthily towards the watcher, and would have served him the same way
-but that he was ready for her. The vicious tail struck, indeed, at his
-chest, but shivered on the hidden stone, broke off, and left Toodlânak
-defenceless. The hunter sprang up and killed her on the spot. He
-searched all over the place, and found the remains of innumerable
-victims, and their property hoarded away. He broke down the house,
-buried his luckless companion, and returned home with the news that at
-last the country was ridded of its pest and might be safely travelled.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VIII
-
-CLOTHING—BOAT BUILDING
-
-
-In the preceding chapters little but an outline has been given of the
-activities of the day in an Eskimo encampment. Boat building is one of
-the occupations in which men and women jointly engage; but before this
-is described at the length it requires, there is much to be said about
-the dressing and fashioning of the various skins which form the most
-important item of Eskimo economy.
-
-The Eskimo woman values none of her possessions more than the ooloo, a
-short-handled knife shaped like a small half-moon turf cutter, chiefly
-used for paring off the inner membrane of the stout sealskin for the
-lighter hangings of the summer tent, but of universal utility. With it
-she cuts out her garments or dismembers a seal. In addition to this she
-has steel or ivory needles and a thimble.
-
-The Eskimo have no woven fabrics or European clothes until they come in
-contact with the whites, and—perhaps unfortunately—acquire the
-beginnings of a civilisation alien to the natural evolution and
-necessities of their lives.
-
-Their own native dress consists entirely of deerskins for winter use
-and sealskins for the summer. Both sets are warmly lined with fur. The
-deerskins employed as clothing are the summer and autumn hides; those
-flayed in the winter are reserved for the kaksak or sleeping blankets.
-The men’s and women’s tunics are lined either with fawn skins or the
-summer skins with the hair on. No underclothing is required, fur always
-being worn next to the skin. The man’s jacket is looser in shape than
-the woman’s, and the hood (nessak) fits closely round the face. The
-woman’s garment is quite different. It has shorter, baggy sleeves, is
-large and roomy at the back, fitting, however, tightly to the waist; it
-has a hood (amout) big enough for two heads, a short stomacher-like
-apron about twelve inches long in front, and a lengthy tail reaching to
-the heels behind. The Eskimo women carry their babies on their backs in
-this queer jacket. The child has no clothing on it, but it keeps
-admirably warm next the fur-clad mother. Its feet rest on her waist
-line and its head peers from out of the capacious hood over her
-shoulder.
-
-Both sexes wear short, wide trousers. For footgear they have long
-deerskin stockings like Lifeguardsmen’s boots, with the hair turned
-next the skin, reaching well up over the knees under the pants. Over
-these is worn a sock like a Turkish slipper, made from the skin of the
-Large Glaucus Gull, the feathers being inside; and over this again goes
-a short sock of deerskin, with the hair turned outwards and upwards so
-as to enable the long boot, or kummik, to pull on easily. This boot is
-tied on below the knee and round the ankle. The sole is made of the
-leather of the large ground seal, with the hair shaved off, and the leg
-is the skin of deer’s legs stoutly stitched together.
-
-The women take immense pride in the cut, fit, workmanship and
-ornamentation of their dresses, showing no little taste and
-discrimination in the management of design and ornament. The various
-furs are introduced in lines, panels and patterns, with an eye to
-colour and texture a skilled furrier might envy.
-
-Prior to the advent of Europeans to the Arctics, fringes of deerskin
-were the most popular form of ornament for clothing; but to-day the
-Eskimo women are passionately fond of elaborate beadwork. The beads are
-of European manufacture, but the design in which they are applied is
-native. The favourite beads are small and brightly coloured. The native
-sempstress will also sew two or three coins down the front of the
-inside jacket and down the tail of the dress, or even the bowls of a
-few spoons. These clink as they walk, and greatly delight their
-wearers.
-
-The Eskimo tailor has a wonderfully correct eye, and can so scrutinise
-a figure as to be able to turn out a well-fitting suit of skins without
-taking a single measurement, or “trying on.”
-
-The men’s clothes are plain, without ornamentation, and the fashion of
-them does not vary with the season. In summer they are lined with the
-white skins of the baby seal, which are as soft and fleecy as lambs’
-wool; in winter, with the skins of the fawn, which are very soft and
-warm.
-
-The Eskimo housewife prides herself greatly upon her store of skins.
-These, and the soapstone cooking utensils, and the carefully housed
-poles for the summer tupik, dogs, sled, and kyak, constitute the wealth
-of a native family. Fine sewing thread is made from the sinew of deer’s
-legs, scraped and dried. For stouter purposes, seal sinew is used.
-Eskimo stitching requires to be seen to be appreciated. It is amusing
-to note that the age of a child can be told at a glance by the length
-of the tail of its little jacket.
-
-Apropos generally of domestic tastes, a word must be added on the
-women’s hairdressing. The hair is generally parted down the centre and
-plaited on either side of the face, the two plaits being looped under
-the ears (reminiscent of the early Victorian style!) and tied in a knot
-at the back. In some tribes the women gather their hair up and bind it
-all into a stiff vertical cone on the top of the head. They weave into
-this stubborn erection every hair which comes out, so that in time a
-woman’s age may be guessed by the size of her topknot. It used to be
-the fashion in bygone days to tattoo the face with linear designs, but
-this has now practically died out.
-
-It is a common error of writers upon the Eskimo folk to assert that
-they oil themselves to keep out the cold, that they drink oil as a
-food, and revel in grease generally. Nothing of this is correct. The
-dirtier and the greasier a man is, the colder he is; so every effort is
-made—not after cleanliness exactly, as that is an impracticable
-standard—to keep grease from the clothes and the person. When engaged
-in preparing or cleaning anything very oily, the women remove part of
-their dress to save it, and afterwards rub away as much of the grease
-as possible from their hands and arms. Seal oil and melted blubber act
-as strong purgatives, hence it would be impossible to use them as
-drink, besides they are required for the lamps.
-
-Perhaps the next most important business of the Eskimo women, after
-cooking and making the clothes, is the preparation of skins for the two
-types of boat in use on the coast. This entails considerable labour and
-skill. The men are responsible for the framework.
-
-The kyak—a creation as truly national to these intrepid coasters as the
-snowshoe may be to the Indian, the ski to the Norwegian, and the
-alpenstock to the Swiss mountaineer—is a covered canoe, graceful as a
-fish, for use at sea. It can be handled in the roughest weather. It
-consists of a light framework, formerly of whalebone, but now generally
-of driftwood, fastened together with thongs of sealskin. It is from
-eighteen to twenty feet in length, strong and elastic to a degree, and
-entirely covered with skins, almost resembling a torpedo in shape, with
-long, tapering extremities. There is a small circular opening
-amid-ships, where the kyaker sits, fitting closely round his body. In
-rough weather he wears a waterproof jacket (of seal gut), the hood
-fitting tightly round his face and the sleeves to his wrists. The lower
-edge of this comes over the opening in the canoe and is laced round it,
-so that man and craft are fairly one.
-
-The Rev. A. L. Fleming, formerly a naval architect, informed the writer
-that the lines of the kyak are perfect, and from the point of view of
-sea-going architecture could not be improved. The Baffin Land kyak is
-broader than the Greenland type. The latter is much narrower, and
-requires great skill to handle. Readers of Arctic literature will
-recall Nansen’s account of the extraordinary feats performed by the
-Eskimo on the west coast of Greenland in manœuvring these canoes. The
-Baffin Islanders are also very skilful. They can right themselves, if
-completely overturned, by a peculiar quick jerk of the paddle. The kyak
-cannot fill, should the waves wash right over it. It probably comes
-nearer the ideal of an unsinkable boat than many a more ambitious
-construction. It would be hard to say, as between hunting and fishing
-(the staple business of their lives), which is the characteristic
-national “sport” of the Eskimo; but certainly no one not born and bred
-to the handling of the kyak could acquire the native degree of ease and
-daring.
-
-The sealskins for these canoes are bleached. Either they are scalded,
-or tied in bundles and hung up in a warm atmosphere to ferment. This
-process is allowed to go on for a week or two, until the stench becomes
-unbearable. When taken down and shaved with the ooloo, the black
-epidermis comes away with the hair, leaving the skins beautifully
-white. The inner membranes are left intact. The next step is to stitch
-the skins together. Bleached hides may be made to alternate with
-unbleaced ones, by way of ornament; or the entire covering may be
-merely black or brown.
-
-The thread is sinew from seal flesh, since it must be derived from the
-same source as the skins, to ensure the same degree of shrinking and
-stretching. The seams are double stitched, first through the skin only,
-leaving the membrane untouched, and then oversewing the latter, so as
-to make them perfectly watertight. The moistened skins are then loosely
-applied to the framework; as they shrink and dry they fit to it
-exactly, and form a light, drum-tight covering over the whole. It is
-part of the man’s job to fit the wooden rim to the opening on top, and
-to make the loops which serve to secure his weapons.
-
-He carries a three-pronged bird spear on the left hand side in front of
-him; on the right is his sealing spear, and between the two is a small
-round tray for the coiled seal line fixed to the detachable spearhead.
-Behind him on the left is his nixie or hook, on the right a heavy
-harpoon for striking walrus or the larger creatures he may encounter,
-between the two and immediately behind him an inflated sealskin with
-the end of his sealing line attached. Thus equipped, the canoe is
-complete, a thing of pride to its owner, which will last all his life
-and be handed down to his sons and their sons after him.
-
-The sealing spear has an ivory (or nowadays a steel) butt for breaking
-ice, and acts as an ice chisel. Its shaft consists of a piece of
-driftwood, its long keen point is made from part of the jawbone or rib
-of the whale, and its detachable barbed head is of steel or ivory. The
-long line attached to this is a stout strip of white whale hide. The
-harpoon, too, is of wood and ivory, as also is the long hunting knife
-and the small kit of lesser tools without which the hunter seldom
-moves. All these things are made during the endless winter evenings,
-while sitting round the seal oil lamps in the igloo, or on stormy days
-when the Arctic blizzard obliterates the world without. (There is an
-interesting collection of Eskimo dresses and implements and utensils to
-be seen in the Ethnological Gallery at the British Museum; but perhaps
-even more representative a one is that in the Natural History Museum in
-New York.)
-
-The paddle of the kyak is made from a long piece of driftwood. Its
-proper length is the span of the owner (the full extent of the two
-extended arms), and half a span again. The blades are narrow, since
-they are for use at sea, and engage the most skilful attention of the
-craftsman. Both are tipped with ivory. This pouteek, as it is called,
-can be used as an outrigger. On top of the kyak, in front of the man,
-there are four strongly made loops of hide, the exact width of the
-blade of the paddle. If the rower wishes to stand up or give play to
-free movement, to cut up and store away a seal either upon the craft or
-inside it, he cannot do so without an outrigger or he would simply
-capsize. To prevent this, he pushes one end of the paddle into the
-loops, which hold it fast. The other end, outboard, acts as a
-counter-weight and exactly balances the canoe. It is then perfectly
-stable and almost impossible to upset. The dexterity of the kyaker has
-already been alluded to. He can do anything with this boat. His
-confidence is so complete that not infrequently, when a heavy wave is
-atop of him, he will deliberately turn turtle, receive the weight of
-the water on the bottom, and right himself when the moment is passed.
-
-The Umiak is a very different craft, and serves the Eskimo family as a
-sort of general pantechnicon and removing van. It consists of a large,
-clumsy framework of wood, covered with the skins of the big ground
-seal, which are dressed into a thick tough leather. It is really an
-open sailing boat, capable of carrying perhaps six families and a huge
-and miscellaneous cargo. It has a square stem and stern and a stumpy
-mast set well forward in the bows. The large square sail used to be
-made in earlier days of skin stitched together, or of the intestines of
-seals blown out and dried, then split open, the long, broad strips
-alternating with narrow strips of the same material, to ensure equal
-stretching and shrinking. Nowadays, the natives provide themselves with
-sail-cloth from the trading posts. The Umiak is an unhandy thing to
-manage, but a good enough boat in a heavy sea way. When on a long
-voyage up or down the coast or across the bays, in former times, the
-Umiak had a double skin; the outer covering becomes so waterlogged and
-the movement so sluggish that the whole thing is cast off, and the
-journey proceeds in the inner, lighter and drier shell. The gut sail
-requires constant wetting to prevent it splitting into ribbons. This
-primitive concern is paddled by women when the paddles become
-necessary, but a man has the steering in his charge.
-
-The oars for the Umiak are clumsy things compared to the kyak paddle.
-The blades are rough oblongs of wood, almost like spades, fitted to
-poles of wood by no means necessarily straight, and bound on by thongs
-of hide. Sometimes the oar is quite a crooked branch, and a collection
-of these in the hide hung boat looks about as prehistoric an outfit as
-Mr. E. T. Reed’s most comic imagination might depict among his
-inimitable parodies of life in the neolithic period.
-
-The Kyak and the Umiak are the two purely native types of boat used on
-the Arctic coast. The people, however, are familiar and handy enough
-nowadays with rowing and sailing boats of European model, wherever they
-have had the opportunity of using and knowing them. They have other
-ingenious means of getting about on the water when boats of any
-description are not to be had at all. The hunter at the edge of the
-floe can stand and paddle himself away out to sea on a raft or slab of
-ice detached from the mass; and the deerstalker inland, anxious to
-cross a sheet of water or a river, will utilise a skin stuffed with
-dried heather, stoutly bound about with thongs of hide. He sits on this
-and skims off as happily as a water-beetle.
-
-The possession of a couple of boats like the foregoing, of a good store
-of hunting weapons, plenty of skins, a team of well-trained dogs, and
-two sleds—one, a short, light, travelling affair for hunting, and the
-other a heavy, long-distance thing for the migrations of the
-family—constitute the Eskimo house-holder’s wealth, and determine his
-social precedence and standing in the tribe.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IX
-
-ESKIMO DOGS
-
-
-The value to the Eskimo of a good team of about five dogs is equivalent
-to that of a kyak or a sled, or a reliable gun. To assess it in terms
-of money would have no significance in a land where utility and
-necessity alone determine the scale.
-
-The breed is part, or half, wolf. In build, the true Eskimo dog is well
-formed, almost slim about the hindquarters compared with the rest of
-his body, the broad and sturdy chest, the strong neck and heavy jaws.
-His hair is very thick, grey or tawny in colour, and his tail immensely
-bushy, always carried erectly, curving over the back. He is a different
-creature to the Samoyede and the Kentucky wolf hound; but probably
-there is very little to distinguish him from the famous Alaskan “husky”
-dog of so much literary fame, and the dog of the Labrador.
-
-The dogs in Baffin Land are fed solely on seal flesh, unlike those of
-the trappers and mail carriers in Alaska and elsewhere, who subsist on
-a spare and spartan ration of frozen fish. Sacks of chopped seal are
-always carried on the sleds for the dogs on a winter journey, skin and
-hair included. They are wonderful travellers, although the speed with
-which a trip may be accomplished depends on a good many other factors
-than dog power alone. In the winter a team may average thirty miles a
-day; or when conditions of ice and wind are particularly favourable
-this figure may be doubled.
-
-The Eskimo dogs begin their lives in quite pleasant domestic comfort.
-They breed in the spring and autumn, and the puppies when born are kept
-on the sleeping place in the tent or igloo, and played with by the
-women and children in order to accustom them to being handled, and to
-the scent of human beings. Otherwise they would grow up wild and
-savage, and a trouble to their owners; and, moreover, might too easily
-fall a fat and toothsome morsel to any particularly hungry parent or
-stray wolf about the camp. They are pretty, playful puppies, full of
-puppy imbecility and fun. When about six weeks old this halcyon period
-of irresponsibility and shelter comes to an abrupt end. Out go the lot
-into the hard world, to eat and sleep with the grown-up dogs of the
-village. And immediately the puppy’s training begins. He has a
-miniature harness made for him and a little sled. The small boys take
-him in hand. They harness him and drive him about, to his unfathomable
-disgust and their own diversion, until he becomes used to the process
-and the various words of command.
-
-As time goes on and he gets a little older his serious education
-engages the attention of the men. Puppy is harnessed to the real sled
-with the older dogs and has to help to drag it to the hunting grounds.
-He objects strongly to leaving the village and what it has of
-possibilities in the way of tit-bits; but the accustomed orders break
-over his head in a fearful roar he has never heard before, and he
-scares up a new obedience. Soon, however, he tries the effect of
-rebellion, and bolts back on the trail, only to be brought up with a
-jerk as he reaches the end of his line. He is unceremoniously dragged
-along on his back, bumping over the rough ice, hating everything and
-everybody, thinking life not a bit worth living and that the bottom of
-his world has fallen out. He is rudely brought to! The leader of the
-team knows what to do. Like a parent spanking a naughty child, the
-leader sails in, and with many a forceful shake and many a shrewd nip
-at every tender point, he forces Puppy to take his rightful station in
-the team and do his best to pull. As he goes back to his own position
-at the head the Leader just passes word along to the rest to follow his
-example. They make quite a point of it. As often as the recruit shows a
-tendency to slack off again, or so much as rolls an eye towards the
-back trail, they give him a shake up or a nip on the leg to encourage
-him to proceed, rather, in the right direction. He receives further
-assistance towards this desirable fixity of purpose by an occasional
-and painfully adroit flick of the hunter’s long driving lash.
-
-A few days of this sort of thing, and the youngster registers the
-lesson that discretion is the better part of valour. He learns to keep
-his objections to himself.
-
-The next thing to dawn upon his expanding mind is that dragging heavy
-weights over the snow makes one’s feet uncommonly sore. The older dogs
-knew that long ago, and lay down before starting in the morning, quite
-willing to have their boots put on. The dog “boot” is merely an oblong
-strip of seal leather with two holes for the nails to go through and a
-couple of thongs to secure the ends round the leg. Everywhere in the
-Arctics the freight dogs are obliged to have protection for their feet.
-But Youngster, whose turn for practical investigation has ere this
-convinced him that nothing is inedible except sticks and stones,
-retires promptly to the back of the sled or behind the nearest cover,
-and eats his boots there and then, with early morning relish. The team,
-to a dog, say nothing, but start off as usual. Youngster licks his
-lips, curls his tail, and feels good. But after a few miles something
-of the curl goes out of his tail, his feet become tender and he droops
-a little. The others plod on; he lags. Instantly comes the sting of the
-whip or a nip of teeth like a vice. Youngster sprints ahead, only to
-flag more and more, to limp and crawl at last with the pain in his
-unprotected, wayworn feet. At the end of the day he simply staggers
-home, a very sad and sobered Puppy. Leader strolls over, when he thinks
-he will, looks at him en passant, and grins. The culprit adds another
-mental note to his list of things not good for the digestion. No more
-boots!
-
-Comes another milestone on the hard path of learning and
-virtue—pilfering.
-
-Young dogs have to learn that everything on the sled is rigorously
-taboo—for them. Not to be touched, or so much as sniffed at, on any
-account whatever. This lesson can only be enforced by many a whipping.
-For Youngster does so love to stroll past the sled with a preoccupied
-air, hands in pocket as it were. If he were a human being he would hum
-a hymn tune. Then, just in that flick of time when no one seems to be
-looking, he steals a mouthful of seal-meat or blubber. Instantly
-retribution envelops him. He is severely thrashed. If an experience of
-this sort repeated once or twice does not cure him his master becomes
-harsh indeed. The hunter must at all costs gain and keep the ascendancy
-over his dogs. The thief has his head forced hard back with the mouth
-wide open, and the man smashes out the two long upper fangs with the
-back of his hunting knife. That bit of violence completes this part of
-Youngster’s spartan education.
-
-He graduates by learning how to smell for seal holes in the ice, how to
-tackle a bear, how to defend himself, how to guard the tent or igloo,
-how to brave every extreme of bitter weather. When an Eskimo dog knows
-all this he becomes a valuable asset to his master.
-
-The Eskimo drives his sled team spread out fanwise. In this formation
-they are less likely to break through the snow crust than if driven
-Indian fashion, one ahead of the other. The tandem style is suitable
-for wooded country, where there is no room to expand and where it is
-imperative to keep to a narrow, perhaps ill-defined trail; but in the
-Arctics one of the greatest dangers of travelling is to fall into deep
-snow. Men and dogs alike can be smothered if the crust gives way, for
-their struggles only cause them to sink the deeper. The dogs are driven
-by word of command only (i.e., orders to get up, start, straight ahead,
-right or left, lie down), and by the whip, a tremendously long thong of
-white whale hide attached to a short stock. Half the art of dog driving
-consists in the right management of this difficult whip. It has to sail
-out to touch just the right dog in just the right place, and should
-crack sharply at the tip. The Leader is the most important, reliable
-and experienced dog in the team. He is attached to the sled by a longer
-trace than the others, so that he runs ahead of them, and his position
-is in the centre. It goes without saying that he is very conscious of
-his eminence, and gives himself insufferable airs.
-
-In camp the team always sleep curled round in the snow, if not in the
-porch at least near their master’s dwelling, ready for any scraps that
-may be flung out; and woe betide any other dog who dares to come near,
-or even essays to pass by! There is a rush and the outsider is severely
-mauled. Another time, he makes a wide détour. The people never leave
-the tents without a guard if they can possibly help it. If the man and
-woman are both away a child is left. The dogs can tell the place is
-inhabited and refrain from a raid, which would only bring a storm about
-their ears if once the alarm were raised. But should the dwelling be
-empty even for a short time, the dogs at once get to know it—and they
-know about the stores of meat and oil and blubber inside! Now, the
-Leader of the team belonging to the establishment is there also as a
-“guard,” but his argument seems to be that this obligation applies only
-to outsiders. Having driven off any strange visitants who may venture
-around, he has no further scruples about helping himself. Moreover, he
-has a remarkable business head. He believes, in letting the others
-down—for his own advantage and prestige.
-
-As soon, then, as he decides the tupik is really empty, he gives one
-short, deep note, well understood by the others dogs, signifying that
-the coast is clear. Then he bounces at the tent wall, bursts through
-it, and snatching the first big mouthful of meat he can get, beats a
-discreet retreat, leaving the others like thoughtless children to do
-the work and get themselves into the required mess. They rush in, of
-course, make hay of the tent, and kick up a tremendous uproar, giving
-themselves away to the whole village. It does not take long for the
-natives to cope with the situation. Armed with sticks, they hurry to
-the spot, and while some penetrate the tent to lay about and drive the
-dogs outside, others stand ready for the culprits when they come out,
-to give them such hard blows as will last them well—until next time!
-Out comes number one, a lump of provender in his teeth. He gets his
-blows right enough, but sticks to the meat ... only to be met, further
-on by the Leader, a surprised and indignant look on his face, as who
-should say “What! You at it again! Stealing, when you ought to be on
-guard! And having the effrontery to try to pass Me with your plunder!
-Put that meat down instantly and I’ll take charge of it! If you want
-any more, go back and get it.”
-
-There is no getting past this. The delinquent is bowled out, rolled
-over, bullied until he loses his head and his booty into the bargain.
-He is glad to escape alive. He breaks away at last, frantically licking
-his wounds. Whereupon Leader absent-mindedly eats the meat and sits
-down to await another scrap from the next offender. He calls this
-keeping his end up with the mob.
-
-On one lurid occasion of this sort, all the canine raiders had escaped
-from the tent but one, a small fat puppy. He happened to be in the
-place at the time and quite enjoyed entering into the spirit of the
-thing—meant to do his best like the others. So he climbed into the
-lamp, freshly replenished with oil, and fitted it so exactly,
-lubricating himself from head to foot, that he stuck in situ to be
-caught, but looking quite proud of his position and feeling altogether
-grown up. He was soaked in oil and grime; oil dripped from his mouth,
-and the laugh on his face plainly said, “My! This is good! Why didn’t I
-think of it before?” He was summarily pulled both out of the lamp and
-out of his complacency. Infantile yells outside told of early
-correction being administered and a lesson in honesty enforced. After
-that his mother took him in hand and licked him clean.
-
-It is sometimes asserted that the Eskimo dog does not bark. This is a
-mistake, as he certainly has a snappy bark of his own, however little
-it may resemble the recognised barks of all other sorts of dogs. For
-the most part he howls.
-
-The dogs, one and all, are up to every sort of trick. Moreover, their
-stomachs are for ever empty and always keen for any sort of food. They
-are fed at night whilst on the trail, in order that the meal should
-have time to digest and strengthen them. Incidentally, they sleep
-soundly buried in the snow, and neither attempt to stray nor to break
-into the hunter’s sleeping place. In the morning they are nowhere to be
-seen. The white expanse remains unbroken. They are all under the snow,
-and in no way inclined to rouse up and be harnessed. Nobody wastes time
-looking for them. Someone takes a lamp outside the shelter and empties
-the oil on the ground. Immediately black noses emerge from here and
-there, tempted by the smell, and the rest is easy.
-
-Once upon a time Nannook (the bear) the Bad Hat of the team, had a
-brilliant idea. He had often considered the weighty problem of the
-driving lash it seemed so impossible for his master ever to forget. The
-point was, how to get rid of it. So long as that whip cracked forever
-about them there was no chance of making the other dogs do his share of
-the work, no opportunity to slack off or snatch a rest. The only scheme
-seemed to be to eat it. Nothing loth, Nannook waited for the usual
-midday halt. The hunter chopped off some frozen pieces of meat, sat
-down in the lee of the sled and ate and smoked. The whip lay unheeded
-on the snow behind his shoulder.
-
-Nannook sneaked up, caught hold of the end of the lash, and steadily
-began to chew. He chewed yard after yard, his stomach feeling better
-with every foot of the way. He chewed up to the very stock, undetected;
-and having packed away at least eighteen feet of seasoned whalehide,
-crept back to the team. Presently the hunter bestirred himself for a
-start. Picking up his whip—he just gazed round. It was a dog, without a
-doubt; but which one? Who on earth could tell! All were innocently
-dozing, every one in his place, the picture of virtuous decorum. No one
-could tell. No one, therefore, could be punished. The rest of the
-journey was accomplished perforce of shouting only. For once in a way
-the dogs had the best of the joke.
-
-It sometimes happens on a long trail with a heavy sled that a blizzard,
-or some other untoward circumstance, may delay a traveller for a longer
-or shorter time; sometimes for days. His food supply gives out and the
-dogs come to an end of their rations. The team gets ever more weary and
-more weak. The hunter goes on ahead, breaking the trail for them on
-snowshoes; the dogs stagger along after him, often lying down and
-refusing to get up. But the trouble has not been unforeseen. The master
-has prepared for this sort of emergency by carefully bringing along
-some particularly bad bits of refuse seal meat. The stench of them
-would imbue a skunk with self-respect, in comparison. Taking one of
-these, he forges ahead, calling the dogs and leaving behind him a lure
-like poison gas. He drops the meat, and the Leader, picking up the
-scent, with a new cock in his dispirited ears, bustles round, spurring
-up the team with the information. “Come on!” he says. “Can’t you see
-he’s dropped that bit? My, can’t you smell it? Hurry up, and let’s get
-it!” They do get up, poor dupes; but the Leader, in virtue of his
-longer trace gets there first, and doesn’t wait to argue. Over and over
-again this manœuvre is repeated, both on the hunter’s part and on the
-Leader’s. The rest of the team make all the effort they can to get
-equal with such duplicity, and sometimes even succeed in snatching
-first at the bait. Anyway, it is a fine way of getting the sled along
-and taking their minds off their troubles. A trail of loathsome scraps,
-each one encouraging a spurt on the part of the dogs, helps over the
-distance. Often an exhausted team has been enabled to cover the last
-few miles by this method, when otherwise they must have dropped.
-
-In spite of the rigour of his life and the necessary hardness of his
-owner, the Eskimo dog is not without that glorious power of faithful
-canine devotion which is one of the most beautiful forms of love on
-earth. The writer knows of at least two instances where a dog has
-wasted away and died of grief in his master’s absence or after his
-death. But such a true canine trait is very rare. For the most part,
-these animals readily transfer their affections to the hand that feeds
-them.
-
-They are savage to all strangers. The team guards its master’s tent or
-igloo because he is the one who provides for it. The dogs sleep in the
-porch as a rule; and before entering a dwelling the visitor is well
-advised to call to one of the inmates to quiet them, otherwise he will
-be severely bitten. In winter, when hungry, the dogs are more dangerous
-than ever. It happened, once, that two Eskimo had died, and been sewn
-up in their blankets and buried beneath a cairn of huge stones in a
-neighbouring valley. One of the bodies was even enclosed in a light
-barrel. During the night the dogs raided the place, tore down the
-stones, and ate the dead. In the summer time they forage for themselves
-on the seashore, picking up small fish left by the tide, and anything
-edible they can find.
-
-The Eskimo dog has a great deal that is wolfish and dangerous in him.
-The strain, indeed, is very little differentiated from the wolf.
-Sometimes a dog will leave camp, go back to the wild, and join a pack
-of wolves as one of themselves. Those who do this seldom return; but
-when they do, puppies of the direct resulting strain are greatly
-valued. It has been remarked that, whereas wolves in the Arctic seldom
-attack a human being, dogs will not uncommonly do so. The extraordinary
-thing about this is that hydrophobia is practically unknown. It would
-be difficult to say exactly what may be the natural span of life of the
-Eskimo dogs, but they seem to be at least as long lived as the larger
-breeds of European dogs.
-
-The Eskimo names his dog ‘The Lively One,’ the ‘Bear,’ the ‘North
-Star,’ and in similar fashion. The animals possess much humour of their
-own; one belonging to the writer, of whom he was extremely fond,
-certainly enjoyed fun, and could very nearly speak!
-
-Lest, while on the subject of these creatures too much space should be
-devoted to them, this chapter cannot be concluded without a brief
-description of the sleds to which their toilsome lives are vowed.
-
-The small, light-going sled used for hunting is only about six feet in
-length. The cross bars are fastened to the runners by sealskin thongs,
-to ensure a certain degree of pliability in travelling over rough ice.
-A pair of reindeer horns with part of the skull attached are fastened
-by thongs to the back of the sled, forming a sort of erect triangle.
-This serves as a rack upon which to hang coils of sealing line and
-various implements, and also as a rest to lean against for anyone
-sitting on the sled. The runners are shod with strips of bone sawn from
-the ribs or jaw of the whale, and fastened on either by wooden pegs or
-by thongs sunk into grooves to prevent them wearing through. These
-runners are the object of very special care and constant daily
-attention on the part of the owner. They are covered with a thick
-coating of seal’s blood, for the sake of a fine surface. The craftsman
-takes a mouthful of this material and squirts it upon the runners,
-moulding it at the same time with his fingers. It freezes even as he
-smooths it down, and with a final squirting of water takes a high, hard
-glaze which ensures smooth and swift running for the sled. If seal’s
-blood happens to be scarce the maker uses a mixture of moss roots and
-water, which gives an almost equally good surface when applied in the
-same way, and looks like nothing so much as a first-class cork lino.
-
-The Kummotik, or long travelling sled, is double the length of the
-foregoing and heavier in proportion. Otherwise its construction is the
-same. It requires a team of from twelve to eighteen dogs, whereas five
-are sufficient for the hunting sled. The loading of a Kummotik is a
-work of art. There is a place for everything, and everything has to go,
-just so, into its place. The spears and weapons are stowed in the
-bottom of the sled in front, by the driver. At the far end, a piece of
-skin is laid down and upon this slab upon slab of blubber for the lamp
-is piled up, and the lamp set atop of the lot, bottom up, because of
-the grease and dirt. Then the meat for the journey is put aboard—frozen
-deer hams, and frozen seals entire, enough for the whole party until
-they fetch up at the next tribe’s camping ground. The meat is, of
-course, uncooked, since a minimum of raw meat gives a maximum of heat
-and strength. (Hence the Eskimo prefer their rations raw when there is
-work to be done. The cooked stew of an evening is a mere luxury meal.)
-A skin is thrown over the heap of provisions to prevent the travellers’
-clothing being soiled by it. Over it all are piled the rolled-up
-sleeping blankets and the karsâte or deerskin rugs for mattresses.
-Knives, axes and lines hang upon the horns behind. The driver’s seat in
-front is a box containing small tools, flint and steel. The whole load
-is securely lashed down to the cross bars of the sled. The man’s spear
-is slipped into the lashings on one side, so as to be handy for use at
-a moment’s notice. The women and children perch on top of the load, or
-make their way alongside on foot, as they prefer. The dogs’ lines are
-all gathered to a point (like the sticks of a fan) just in front of the
-runners, when they are tied and then divided into the two short traces
-which, fastened to right and left on the runners, draw the sled.
-
-A still more ancient form of sled was in use among the Eskimo before
-the advent of the whites, but the elders of the villages remember it
-well and describe it to-day. In those times wood was very scarce, tools
-very rude, and whales more abundant than at present. So strips of
-whalebone taken from the mouth (before this valuable material came into
-the markets of the world at all) were stitched together by whale or
-hide thongs, until a sled could be fashioned out of them, something
-like a huge, long, black shovel, very hard, durable and strong. Dogs
-harnessed to this contrivance made good speed with it, even with the
-driver squatting upon it. In one respect it was more serviceable than
-the modern form with runners, since unlike these it did not sink in
-snow or easily break through a rotten crust. It should be noted that a
-full-grown whale has about a ton of this black whalebone fringe hanging
-from his jaw, the longest part of it attaining six or seven feet when
-the mouth is open; so that a fair sized sled could easily be made out
-of such a great supply.
-
-The struggle for existence in the Arctic has taught the Eskimo to
-utilise in the most ingenious ways resources at their disposal so
-limited that the marvel is so self-sufficing, so healthy, hearty and
-happy a civilisation, of its kind, could ever have been evolved.
-
-Where these tribes have come so much in contact with other peoples, and
-even with well-meaning white enterprise on their behalf, that they have
-attempted to substitute for their old ways a method and mode of living
-indigenous neither to the climate nor to their own physique, they have
-invariably degenerated. The Eskimo of Labrador and Alaska have largely
-abandoned the snow house for the log shack or sod hut, and have in
-consequence been decimated by tuberculosis. Everywhere, contact with
-“civilisation” has tended so to divorce these children of the North
-from their natural environment as to initiate their wholesale decline.
-It is only now, in “the last North of all”—in Baffin Land, Boothia
-Island, Victoria Land, and the rest—that the Eskimo retain their old
-ways and their old vigour. Their life and their type everywhere else
-has become mongrel and nondescript. While there can never, of course,
-be any question in believing and thinking man’s mind about the
-inestimable boon of Christianity and educating these people along the
-lines suggested by a sympathetic study of them on the spot, it seems to
-be very inadvisable to interfere with them, to “civilise” them too much
-after the unsuitable European model, to revolutionise the natural and
-suitable scheme of life they have so bravely and so ingeniously worked
-out for themselves during the uncivilised centuries of their existence
-in the bleakest and most inhospitable regions of the earth.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER X
-
-TRIBAL LIFE
-
-
-In their family and tribal life the Eskimo carry out a very smooth
-running sort of communism, the chief tenets of which are rigidly
-enforced peaceableness, open hospitality to the stranger, and a sharing
-of food and the necessaries of precarious existence among each other.
-Tribal government is wholly patriarchal in character. The Angakooeet,
-or chief conjurors—a class of men apart—hold the first place in public
-esteem and common council. After them the village is ruled by the
-successful hunters, who foregather with the former and with the aged
-and experienced, when it is a question of deciding where to go and what
-to do about the hunting, or change of encampment, or treatment of a
-delinquent.
-
-The Eskimo have no idea of authority, except that which one man may
-exercise over another in virtue of his superior wisdom, experience,
-skill or strength. There has recently been some question of
-inaugurating a reindeer and musk ox industry on the vast moss pastures
-of the hinterland of Baffin Land, and the purport of much evidence
-given on this subject before a Royal Commission abundantly confirms the
-experience of the present writer, and emphasises the remarks that have
-been made as to the inadvisability of rushing matters with regard to
-“civilising” the Eskimo, and radically changing his mode of life from
-that to which the conditions of his environment have hitherto formed
-him. Savage as these conditions are, the Eskimo has wrought out his own
-well-being, and in his native state is as happy and contented an
-individual as could be desired. He has his hard seasons of
-semi-starvation, when the hunting is poor; but even these are borne
-with cheerfulness and equanimity.
-
-“They seem to have the communal idea very strongly implanted,” said D.
-Jewess, Esq., one of the witnesses. “Theirs is a community in which one
-man is equal to any other man. The idea of one man being a servant to
-another would not seem to be native to the Eskimo; it is a foreign
-idea. It would seem that they must learn the whole idea of one man
-serving another before they could be counted upon as reliable
-employees.
-
-“An Eskimo will serve you faithfully on certain conditions, and will
-expect his payment afterwards. He will serve you for a limited time and
-perform almost any work, and will then expect his payment. The moment
-that payment is made he is an absolutely free man; but for the period
-of work, if he understands his contract clearly, he will serve you
-faithfully. They seem to work partly through the binding force of a
-promise; but a great factor in keeping them at work seems to be that of
-having them understand that they will be well rewarded at the end. As
-is the case with all human beings, they vary; but on the whole they may
-be considered as faithful as white people found in civilised
-communities. Experience seems to show that they will keep to an
-agreement unless they get angry. In this event, they seem to forget
-their promise. If they, in a casual manner, more or less promise to do
-a thing, they are as likely as not to fail. Like most primitive people,
-if they trust you they will do what they can to justify your confidence
-in them.
-
-“At the present time the Eskimo is not responsible. He would make an
-excellent servant, and in time an excellent trapper, guide and hunter.
-This is speaking of the Coronation Gulf Eskimo, who have known white
-men only during the past four or five years. It would seem that the
-Eskimo of Hudson Bay and of the east generally have other
-characteristics which have been moulded through this influence. It is
-not thought that this contact with white men is necessarily an
-advantage, if one is trying to convert the Eskimo into a reliable,
-responsible servant or working man. A great deal naturally depends upon
-the kind of white men with whom the natives have had to associate.”
-
-It must be remembered that life in an Eskimo tribe is almost a family
-one. Each family is interdependent upon the others, and all have close
-ties and relationships. Thus anything which interferes with the general
-harmony is dangerous and, in the unwritten law, a crime.
-
-Matte, a good hunter and a man of standing in the tribe of X——, in the
-locality of Z——, had for long disturbed the peace of the rest. He had
-quarrelled, had spread ill reports about the doings of the hunters, had
-divulged their secrets, and been generally independent and unsociable.
-For a long time Matte was a thorn in the side of his tribe. He
-disregarded their customs and traditions, and became, according to
-Eskimo law, altogether a first-class misdemeanant. At last he became
-unbearable. His big voice and burly frame were no longer tolerable in
-the settlement. A day came when, in his absence, the Angakooeet and
-chief men met in council to decide what should be done. His case was
-reviewed and discussed at length, and arguments were brought forward
-both for and against the accused. At length the verdict was given by
-the Angakut, the Chief of the Conjurors, and ratified by the Council.
-Matte was to be put to death.
-
-Five men were chosen by the Angakut, and instructed in their duties.
-Two were to hold the prisoner’s arms, two his legs, and the fifth was
-to strike and kill.
-
-As the time for the man’s return approached the executioners went out
-and waited for him in the path outside the village. No sooner had he
-appeared than they seized upon him. Matte read his doom in their eyes.
-He had but time for one ejaculation of despair when the knife struck
-through his breast and justice was done. The body was thrown aside and
-left for the dogs and wolves to rend and devour.
-
-The five men returned to their homes. One of them (the one who
-afterwards related the story to the writer), married Matte’s widow at
-her express wish, and “lived happy ever after.” The woman indeed was
-quite agreeable to the removal of her first husband, as it was
-miserable to be the wife of so unpopular a member of the community.
-
-Continued quarrelling, like that of this man Matte, is punishable by
-death. So also is murder. A thief is banished from the village, but
-petty pilferers are merely sent to Coventry.
-
-Old people are held in great respect among the Eskimo, and their
-counsel is always considered. They help as far as they are able in the
-household work, the old men repairing weapons, harness, etc., and the
-old women in sewing or tending the lamps. In times of scarcity, as in
-winter, meat and oil are always shared round. Directly a deer or seal
-is brought in it is cut up and pieces sent to each needy family. In
-times of plenty each family is supposed to provide for itself; but old
-people, widows and orphans have always the first claim upon those who
-have the means.
-
-Among these people, mutual kindliness is a general obligation. A widow
-or orphan child is never left alone, but taken into the house and
-family circle of the nearest relative. The widow gives her services in
-return for food and lodging and clothing, and the child is cared for
-exactly as the man’s own offspring.
-
-Children have always the right of entry to any house and to partake
-there of whatever food may be going. Women are seldom refused a like
-privilege. In times of famine children are fed first, the women next
-and the men last. The writer has known a hunter to go out four days in
-succession and meet with no success. He had shared a portion of seal
-with another man who had caught one and cut it up as usual, but this
-had been given to his wife and family, whilst he himself, taking no
-more than a drink of warm water, went off with unimpaired cheerfulness
-to try his luck again.
-
-Strangers and travellers, too, are always entertained and provided for
-so far as the means of the moment may permit. A native arriving from
-another tribe and having no relations in the village just puts up at
-any igloo he may chose—as a rule he will select the family best able to
-entertain him—and there his dogs are fed, his equipment is repaired or
-the necessary material offered, and food and a sleeping place provided
-for himself. Should he be on the trail alone, a temporary wife is
-furnished him from the widows or spinsters of the community, and it
-becomes her business to see that his clothes are dried and mended, and
-that when he departs again he has sufficient food to carry him over the
-next stage of his journey.
-
-The Eskimo are aware that in some respects European customs differ from
-their own, and when entertaining a white man his peculiarities are
-rigidly respected. The Eskimo standard of morals is not that of the
-European. It may be that in this matter of the temporary wife, as in
-the annual exchange of wives during the Sedna festivities, nature is
-making her own instinctive provision for the continuation of a race;
-otherwise so heavily handicapped are they by arctic conditions of life
-generally that without it wedlock would scarcely suffice for the
-purpose. The Eskimo despite customs which look like promiscuity
-according to the standards of civilisation, are not afflicted with the
-diseases associated with European vice—until they come in contact with
-unscrupulous whites. Either the germs of these scourges have not made
-their appearance in the Eskimo communities, or the people are
-particularly resistive to them. That this latter supposition is not
-borne out is evidenced by the havoc that has been wrought among the
-tribes in the past. The Eskimo, when left to themselves, are a moral
-people according to their own ideas, and the rude health they keep
-despite these strange customs, seems to vindicate them from an
-unthinking criticism.
-
-If he can, the wayfarer makes suitable offerings in return, but they
-are not necessarily expected. He drops in on the family overnight, just
-perhaps when the hunter has returned with a good fat seal, and the
-jolly distribution of it all round is going on. There is a broad smile
-on the face of the housewife as she picks out the best bits for her
-friends and leaves the scraggy remnants for those of whom she cannot
-profess to be so fond. The children rush hither and thither, willing
-servitors of those who cannot come themselves.
-
-The blood is carefully scooped into an ice bowl for future stew or for
-the glazing of sled runners. At the hospitable shout, “Kileritse!
-Kileritse!”—“Come ye! Come ye!”—everyone, friend and stranger alike,
-crowds into the house and squats on the bench or the floor, or in the
-porch, and is duly served out with his share. Nothing is heard for
-awhile but the crunch of strong ivory teeth; the red blood stains hands
-and faces; black eyes glisten with enjoyment. Then, after a time, the
-hum and clatter of talk rises to the smoky roof. Everything is
-devoured, even the entrails (squeezed through the fingers to flatten
-and empty them). Reindeer moss, taken from the stomach of a deer may be
-served up as well by way of that greatest possible luxury—a salad!
-
-Finally, everyone goes to bed. The doorway is blocked up, blankets are
-unrolled, and men and women and children, stripped to the skin, wrap
-themselves up in these and lie down with their heads towards the lamps
-and their feet towards the back of the snow house, and sleep the sleep
-of health and good humour and repletion until the break of another
-arctic winter “day.”
-
-The children of an Eskimo community have quite a good time. Whenever
-infanticide has been practised among these people, it was never through
-cruelty or wanton waste of infant life, but simply because of a dearth
-of provisions. As a matter of fact, the Eskimo prides himself on having
-as large a family as possible. He is entitled to have as many wives as
-he can support. It is not uncommon for a well-found man to have three
-wives—possibly sisters—all living amicably together. The children are
-named after some place or object, and many names descend from father to
-son. Thus we have “Moneapik,” the little egg; “Oonapik,” the little
-hunting spear; “Pitsoolak,” the sea pigeon; “Shokak,” roof of the
-mouth; and other names too crude for translation.
-
-The pastimes of the children are just like those of children all the
-world over. On fine days they romp with the puppies, as described
-elsewhere, or they borrow a sealskin from their mothers and, finding a
-snow incline, drag it to the top and toboggan down on it in fine style
-and with resounding glee. They build snow houses; play with little
-improvised sledges; kick a seal bladder about by way of a ball;
-discover cat’s cradles for themselves with any odd bits of thong; and
-get up to all the usual mischief with bows and arrows. The girls make
-dolls. The boys have an ivory top corresponding to cup and ball, and
-another game called “spearing the seal,” which is played by two, with a
-piece of skin for the ice, and a bit of bone that moves about
-underneath it for the seal. There is a blow hole, of course, and a
-miniature spear.
-
-The education of the Eskimo boy all turns on hunting. All sorts of
-curious observances wait on his first adventures in that line. When he
-secures his first weasel, for instance, he gives it to the dogs, simply
-to be torn in pieces; and that night has to sit up by the igloo door,
-one hand on hip and in the other a lamp stick. Possibly the root idea
-is to defend himself from the spirit of the little beast. When he gets
-his first bird, Young Hopeful sits in the middle of the sleeping bench,
-his mother on one side and his grandmother on the other. The boy is
-told to take off his jacket, and the two women wrench the bird apart
-between them in a sort of tug of war, to the accompaniment of cries of
-congratulation. The mangled spoil is then eaten to bring good luck to
-the boy.
-
-The following tale of the voluntary suicide of the old people who feel
-that they have outgrown their usefulness to the community, and have
-rather become a burden to it, shows how strongly the communal feeling
-dominates the Eskimo, how essential to existence each one of them finds
-the social life of the tribe and village to be.
-
-For many weeks summer has reigned in the arctics. Snow has disappeared.
-The ice has broken up and drifted away to the south; only a few bergs
-remain, like the remnants of a majestic fleet, wending their wandering
-way after the rest. For weeks on end it has been one long, glorious
-day, when the sun has scarcely set an hour. The weather is hot and the
-sky is blue. Arctic flowers and arctic heather gem the short turf;
-streams and cascades fill the valleys with the unwonted music of
-running water. The dogs lie about, basking in the sunshine, or betake
-themselves to the seashore to hunt for fish and such toothsome morsels
-as may be left in the rock pools by the falling tide. The village of
-sealskin tents is pitched in a sheltered spot near some handy stream,
-overlooking the inlet. Contentment, ease and plenty are the order of
-the day. The kyakers skim the waters of the bay, hunting as usual, and
-in the evening the boys have a turn in the same light craft, to
-practice with harpoon or birdspear. They vie with each other in skill
-and speed, and take lessons from their elders.
-
-The old men and women potter about, visiting each other. The crones
-occupy themselves teaching the younger women how things were best done
-in their day, and the granfers fight their own battles over again and
-exploit their own adventures, as they listen to the talk of the younger
-men—the tales of more recent feats accomplished, perils survived, and
-clever captures achieved. As the bright day wanes to that short
-twilight which is the arctic summer night, the men fetch their blankets
-from the tents, roll themselves up in them under the shelter of some
-boulder, and sleep in the open air.
-
-The month of the eider ducks has come and gone. The women have manned
-their boats and made their annual raid on the island where the birds
-breed, returning with hundreds of eggs, plenty of ducks, and a goodly
-store of eiderdown from the nests. The days have been one long, joyous
-picnic, all the hardships, privations and dangers of the winter
-forgotten. The babies, brown and mother-naked, have sprawled about in
-the sun and waxed fat and jolly, with the freedom and the play and the
-plenty of summer.
-
-But now the time has come to get ready for a very big annual enterprise
-indeed—the great deer hunt, upon which the fortunes of the tribe will
-turn for months. If the Eskimo lay up little store of food, they
-accumulate all the hides they can for winter clothing. For several
-weeks before the start is made, stores of meat are prepared, slices of
-seal cut and spread on the rocks, or hung on lines in the sun to dry.
-Piles of moss and cotton plant are collected and dried for the winter’s
-supply of lamp wick. Sealskins are cleaned and stretched and dried for
-clothing, boot soles, boat coverings, and water buckets; intestines are
-inflated and dried for sail cloth and material for making windows. The
-dogs are outfitted with sealskin panniers for transport purposes. The
-trek ahead of the tribe is a long and laborious one. They will journey
-for many days by water up the rivers, and climb long ranges of hills
-and cross many valleys, before they reach the interior and the pastures
-of the deer. Each man, woman and child must shoulder his own pack, for
-none can carry a double load. And so, it often chances, comes the
-tragedy of old and enfeebled age.
-
-Seorapik was an octogenarian. Her hair was grey and her back was bent.
-She had managed, somehow, the previous year to carry her belongings on
-the long, long trail, and to stumble along after the tribe. But at last
-the bitter fact forced itself upon her that she could follow the
-hunters no more. She must stay behind—alone. She could no longer carry
-her load nor keep pace with the folk on the way, and none might carry
-her. She had no alternative but to remain in the deserted village and
-await the tribe’s return.
-
-Now Seorapik, like every other Eskimo, was an intensely sociable being.
-She loved nothing so much as to hear laughter and jokes about her, and
-to be in the thick of all the village talk and doings. As she faced the
-prospect of the long lonely weeks ahead, in the lifeless silence of the
-empty camp, with the days growing ever shorter and colder, without a
-soul—except perhaps a child—to bear her company, her heart quailed and
-grew very heavy. There was the danger, too, of attack by wolf or bear,
-and of sickness coming on—and death. Death, all alone! True, they would
-leave her a plentiful store of food—the good village folk—and lots of
-skins; but what comfort could these afford her in their absence?
-
-But the law of the North is stern and immutable.
-
-They knew it—those sons and daughters of hers, and all their sons and
-daughters. They grieved for Seorapik, and remembered her many acts of
-kindness to each and every one of them, and her life of cheery toil
-spent wholly in their service. They had a custom to be sure—but it was
-hard to endure it when it came face to face. A familiar custom,
-designed to meet such as case as this; but a heartbreaking one, all the
-same. Seorapik remembered it, too, and was the first to summon the
-courage to announce it.
-
-She proposed to bid the tribe goodbye rather than let it take leave of
-her. Her time to go on the long, lone journey from which none ever
-returned could not be far off in any case. She decided to anticipate
-it. She could not face seeing her folk load up the packs, start out on
-the trail, without her, and disappear over the hills. She could not
-contemplate the intense loneliness that it would all mean, and miss the
-laughter of the children, and even the rough and tumble among the dogs.
-So the dread subject was broached to her son.
-
-He gave his assent. Itteapik announced the decision to the villagers,
-and they came to help with the preparations for Seorapik’s death.
-
-A rough, round igloo was built, and the old woman withdrew into it,
-taking her few belongings, escorted by all her kindred and friends.
-They encouraged her to the last with every kindly and sympathetic thing
-they could think of to say. She braved it out, and, with her cheery but
-quavering goodbye still in their ears, her loved ones blocked up the
-entrance to the little death chamber in such a way that no dog or wolf
-might break in.
-
-And there she sat down slowly and willingly to starve to death, quite
-happy so long as her children continued to come from time to time and
-call to her from outside, and tell her all that was going on, every
-single little thing that happened.... She never asked for food or
-drink; they never gave it.... She never wanted to come out; they never
-moved a stone.... She simply had to go. Their part was to make her last
-days, her last hours, as happy as they could, simply by being
-there—quite close—outside.
-
-Then the time came when the feeble voice just ceased to make one more
-response. She had gone on her own long journey first, to the land where
-parting would be no more, nor the fear and sadness of it. Her last
-hours had been happy ones, cheered by the sounds of the village life,
-the cries and gurgles of the babies, the shouts and cat-calls of the
-boys and girls, the murmur of men and women talking over their
-accustomed tasks. She had no loneliness to bear, after all, no
-desolation, no silence. The old Eskimo died with a smile of love and
-contentment on her face, with a long record behind her of woman’s good
-and motherly work, of a humble, “primitive” life indeed, but lived
-according to what light she had—and so into the better life beyond.
-
-There was Nandla (the spear), too, the blind hunter, who also went to
-death under the lash of arctic circumstance.
-
-The incident took place near Davis’ Strait, and was related to the
-writer by one who had witnessed it. Again, the inexorable law of the
-wild left one handicapped as Nandla was no choice. The man was
-comparatively young, but by reason of his blindness useless to himself
-and a burden upon others. In a hungry land, where every extra mouth to
-be filled represents a problem, there is no room for one who cannot
-provide for himself. The severity of the code of the North is very
-great. It cannot be judged by the ordinary standards of humanity.
-
-Spring was at hand—the joyous spring of the arctics. The days were
-lengthening and the seals increasing in numbers. They were coming up
-from the south for the breeding season. In the village all was life and
-bustle. The hunters were full of preparations, and the dogs scarcely
-less so. The boys were loading the sleds and harnessing the teams. One
-by one, each hunting outfit glided off over the frozen ground, out
-towards the bay.
-
-Outside his snow house sat Nandla, the blind hunter, listening to every
-sound and seeing every detail in his mind’s eye. His heart was heavy as
-lead. In his younger days he, too, had gone forth just like these
-others, to spear the season’s catch, and come home rejoicing with a
-heavy sled. But repeated attacks of snow blindness (despite his wooden
-snow goggles) had destroyed his sight; and here he was, in early middle
-age, a useless, hopeless, helpless man, tied to the house, dependent
-upon his folk for food and clothing, and a drag upon them all.
-
-Each night, as the hunters came home, the whole tribe gathered as usual
-round the cooking pots, when the excitements and doings of the day
-would be discussed with no less gusto than the food. Nandla always had
-his place in the family circle, and eagerly drank in every word the
-hunters had to say. He longed to hunt again, himself; to bring back the
-kill, to see the children come pushing into his house for their share,
-and to bid his wife give generously to the aged and the destitute! In
-his mind he pictured it all: the village nestling in the bay, huge,
-snow-clad cliffs rearing up at the back of it, and overhead the pure
-blue of the bright sky, where the glaucus gulls wheeled and cried. He
-pictured the scavenger ravens perched about everywhere, on the look-out
-for bits; the vast expanse of the frozen bay, glaring white in the cold
-sunlight; and beyond, a heavy black mist smoking up in the wind,
-marking the water line. Out there were the hunters—mere dots—moving
-about in the still immensity.
-
-And here was he—Nandla—idle and useless, unable to occupy himself even
-with such tasks as fell to the ancients of the tribe—the repairing of
-lines, harness, and weapons. He could not patch up a snow house any
-more, or trim a lamp! Often, during the months of severe weather and of
-scarcity his relations had been hard pushed to find the wherewithal to
-feed him or clothe him. Nandla was very wretched.
-
-At length, one evening, after just such a bad spell of weather and of
-luck, Nandla begged to be taken out on to the hunting grounds. Now, his
-relatives had been thinking things over rather grimly, and had seen
-nothing ahead for him but long years of misery and possibly of want.
-The problem suggested but one solution. It was simple enough. This
-request of the blind man’s to be equipped once more for the hunt and
-taken along with the rest, gave them their opportunity. They fell in
-with his desire and made their plan. They knew of a certain rout where
-danger lay. Nandla should be taken that way.
-
-It was neither treachery nor murder they planned, but an end for the
-afflicted man of his anxieties and griefs. Nandla set out that morning
-full of delight. His heart was full of unwonted excitement. He yelled
-to the dogs and bumped and glided over the ice on the sled with a long
-missed sense of exhilaration.
-
-They soon reached the grounds. Nandla’s guide seized his hand and led
-him towards a gaping seal hole.
-
-“Follow me!” he said, dropping the other’s hand and lightly stepping to
-one side.
-
-“I follow!” replied the sightless man, and straightway fell into the
-hole.
-
-He went right under, then and there—under the ice—and was immediately
-drowned and frozen. A handy piece of ice served to seal the death trap,
-and all was over. Nandla had died on the hunt, and had entered the
-Eskimo heaven like the other valiant men of his tribe, and taken his
-place with the doughtiest of them, where there would be joy and plenty
-for evermore.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XI
-
-TRIBAL LIFE—Continued
-
-
-Childhood in the arctics does not last long. There are among the Eskimo
-a number of strange customs and superstitions attending not only the
-transition time between girlhood and maturity, but the whole physical
-life of woman, which may have their interest for the ethnologist
-(especially from the point of view of the interpretation of the
-mentality of primitive peoples), but in which the general reader would
-scarcely find much interest. Suffice it to say that the root
-reason—probably instinctive—underlying many of these observances and
-rites, these taboos and indications, is very possibly a hygienic one,
-since in nearly every instance some purpose of the sort seems to be
-unconsciously served. It may be that herein lies one of the true
-distinctions between uncivilised and civilised existence. In the
-latter, most of the functional aspects of life are subordinated to the
-intellectual and the spiritual, while in the former they bulk
-self-consciously and far more obtrusively even than among the lower
-animals.
-
-The Eskimo community in sanitation or in sex matters has few
-reticences. This may be another way of saying it has no pruderies. The
-native attaches no more importance to the functions of sex than to
-those of eating, drinking or sleeping. It would, of course, be easier
-to attribute complete insouciance in these respects to the native mind
-if, instead of trapping some of them out with rather elaborate
-ceremonial, it kept them all much on a level. In most instances of
-insistence, however, a hygienic motive, conscious or unconscious, lies
-behind them. Although the people live under very crude conditions,
-crowded together in the igloo, without privacy or special quarters for
-women, they are not without a sense of the fitness of things or some
-idea of personal modesty. It is the height of ill-breeding to stare,
-for instance, at anyone whilst dressing or undressing.
-
-Like the Indians, and like most other uncivilised people, the Eskimo
-marry early, sometimes indeed at the age of twelve years. Unions are
-arranged by the mothers and grandmothers. A woman with a marriageable
-daughter is fully alive to the advantage of seeing a good hunter attach
-himself to the domestic circle. She looks round in good time, and
-noting some promising youth, makes overtures to his mother on the score
-of the cleverness, the docility and the industry of her girl. The whole
-thing at once becomes a fertile topic of discussion. Some amicable
-understanding having been reached, presents are interchanged and the
-young couple are informed that they are to be married. There is no
-ceremony. The girl is sent to her mother-in-law’s house, and for a
-month or more works there under a pair of sufficiently vigilant eyes.
-This gives the boy also an opportunity of making up his mind about her.
-And the prospective bride has a chance to do the same about him. As a
-rule, the whole thing works out quite satisfactorily, and even happily;
-but if the girl turns out lazy or careless or bad-tempered, a divorce
-is declared and she returns to her parents’ igloo, to be married
-elsewhere, with better luck next time.
-
-This sending of the bride to the hunter’s mother’s house scarcely
-amounts to an interval of probation. The girl certainly expects to
-stay. In all probability the young folk have known each other from
-childhood up, and there is no reason to suppose their marriage will be
-anything but a success. It is the Eskimo way of asserting the
-world-wide fact that you never know a person until you have to live
-with him—or her.
-
-Should, however, real faults of temper or character be presently
-discovered on either side, it is quite open to the bride or bridegroom
-to ask to have a divorce declared. The matter is arranged between the
-families concerned, not necessarily by the Angakok. Should a girl be
-returned on her people’s hands enceinte, after an experiment of this
-sort (not a likely contingency at an early age), the child forms no
-obstacle to her contracting another union later on. It is adopted into
-the mother’s family and cared for as usual, without a trace of stigma
-attaching to either. In the Arctics, where families are small, children
-are an asset, and represent little burden to a community every member
-of which is willing to help feed and support them. If a child is a boy,
-he will grow up to be a hunter, and catch seals for the tribesfolk; if
-a girl, she will become the wife of a hunter and the mother of more
-hunters.
-
-The difference between married life and free or promiscuous unions,
-even with this primitive folk, is quite clearly marked. A married
-woman, i.e., a woman belonging definitely and recognisedly to such and
-such a man, is faithful to him and he to her, so long as harmony reigns
-between them and no “divorce” takes place. The occasional interchange
-of wives, such as during the Sedna ceremony, is a recognised
-institution of Eskimo life, and interrupts the even tenor of the
-connubial way in no permanent sense. There is a good deal of
-“immorality” (according to standards entirely inapplicable to this
-people in the native state), and promiscuous intercourse with widows
-and discarded wives. It is from this class that strangers staying in
-camp are accommodated with their temporary partners.
-
-Fidelity is observed between married people while they agree to remain
-married. Sometimes, however, two husbands will come to an agreement
-with each other, with the knowledge and consent of their respective
-wives, to effect a temporary exchange. Again, fidelity is now observed
-as long as the exchange endures, but reverts to the original partner
-when presently dissolved. Should any children come of this interlude,
-they generally remain with the mother, the permanent husband being
-quite willing to adopt them.
-
-The new-made bridegroom does not leave his parents’ home and set up his
-own establishment until he is able to maintain it by hunting. If the
-husband and wife belong to different tribes, the woman is adopted into
-that of the man. The men sometimes maltreat their wives, if aggravated
-by shrewish tempers or bad household management, but children very
-seldom experience any but the kindest and most indulgent treatment. The
-writer knew a boy who stabbed his mother in the arm during a fit of
-temper, but was merely scolded for it. That he knew no better was the
-excuse alleged in his defence, and it was his elder’s business to teach
-him self-control and good behaviour. Children are devotedly loved by
-the Eskimo, and maternity (never prolific in the arctics) is held in
-the highest esteem. If the men occasionally beat the women it has never
-been known that children are ever abused or neglected. All travellers
-and observers agree in this respect.
-
-A girl will be attended in childbirth with her first baby, but not
-after that. The expectant Eskimo mother has to be alone (except on the
-first occasion), in a little house set apart for her, and without
-assistance. After it is born, the baby is never washed but rubbed down
-with a soft fur or bird skin and put straight away, stark naked, into
-the capacious hood of its mother’s tunic. The woman must, however,
-never eat alone during this time, lest a Tougak with three fingers
-steal her food and bring evil upon the child. She must pay no visits
-until she has quite recovered in the space of a full month, and only
-then if she has a new suit of clothes.
-
-As an illustration of what has been said about some real reason
-underlying such injunctions as the foregoing, it may be remarked that,
-why the mother may not eat alone is probably to ensure that she does
-not starve. She is in solitary confinement, and cannot procure and
-prepare food for herself. To ensure her being fed she must have the
-food brought to her and the messenger stays to share the meal. Again,
-an expectant mother must always run out of her igloo or tupik during
-the day when the dogs howl. They do not howl incessantly, as might be
-imagined, since they are away with the hunters in the day, and asleep,
-buried in the snow, at night. The woman has to sit up on her haunches
-when she hears the dogs in the night-time, and not lie down again until
-they cease. After all, there is good sense in this. The women sit about
-in their houses for the most part, and get comparatively little
-exercise. The two rules involved in this dog howling enactment ensure
-the expectant mother a modicum of exercise and fresh air, which she
-might not otherwise exert herself to obtain.
-
-Childbirth is always attended by the women conjurors, never by the men.
-The event in itself is thought little of, and not looked forward to
-with any dread. The writer has known of a case of husband and wife
-being on the trail together with their sled, in midwinter, when the
-woman was taken in labour. The man merely stopped the team and hastily
-put up a snow shelter. The wife retired to it for a little while, then
-placed the new-born child in her hood, clambered back upon the sled,
-and continued the journey. A long day’s journey later, they reached the
-village for which they were making, and in a very short while the
-mother was walking about in it, as well and strong as ever.
-
-The would-be mother who has reason to fear her hopes of a child are
-groundless, has recourse to the conjuror, the Angakok. Here again, the
-interrogations, the incantations, the conjuration to which this worthy
-commits himself (the while his spirit is supposed to ascend to the moon
-to procure “material for a child”), the conjuror claims and is allowed
-the right of cohabitation and so follow the accompaniment of a natural
-sequence of events, which probably result in the woman realising her
-desire. In many instances the superstitions with which Eskimo laws and
-injunctions are wrapped up, serve to enforce them. Otherwise they would
-either not be followed at all, or would have no weight in public
-estimation. It is only possible to make head or tail of primitive
-ritual by the aid of some tentative interpretation of the sort, which
-must be deduced from long familiarity with the people amid their own
-surroundings.
-
-
-
-All was quiet in the village. The sealers had gone off early in the
-morning, taking the boys with them, and the women had settled down to
-their own tasks for the day. The old folks were for the most part
-asleep on the sleeping benches in the dwellings. It was a cloudy day,
-visibility very low, sun-dogs in the misty heavens foretold bad weather
-to come.
-
-Suddenly a tumult of sound broke upon the village, and the few old dogs
-left there on guard gave vigorous tongue in turn, as somewhere from out
-the murk came a chorus of yowls and yelps mingled with the shouts of
-men and the sharp crack of whips.
-
-An immediate exodus took place. Everyone sprang up and ran off to meet
-the newcomers. The children scrambled up the cliff at the back of the
-little settlement, sheltering it, and the elders tottered along to the
-head of the pathway cut through the sijak or shore ice, to catch a
-glimpse of the strangers and their sleds. Presently two large
-travelling outfits with full team of dogs, and crowded with Eskimo,
-swept into view. Cries of “Chimo! Chimo!” (Welcome) resounded from
-every side, and there were hearty hand-shakings as the strangers
-tumbled out and declared their gladness to have arrived.
-
-It seemed they had come from Fox Channel, many “sleeps” away, and had
-travelled over hills and across frozen bays and through deep snow, for
-days and days, in order to visit this tribe. In a twinkling the dogs
-were unharnessed and fed, the sleds unloaded, and the guests carried
-off into the hospitable igloo under the cliff.
-
-Then matters began to clear, and the object of the journey declared
-itself. A head man and his wife, it seemed, had come this long distance
-on behalf of their son, a lad of about fifteen, a promising young
-hunter of marriageable age, who desired to find a wife. No girl in his
-own tribe had taken his fancy, but the family had heard of a likely
-bride in the Middle Coast tribe, and had come to see her and her
-people. She had the reputation of being clever at all household duties,
-docile and pleasing in manner, with eyes like sloes and hair as glossy
-black as the raven’s wing. Moreover, they had heard that she had no
-relatives and dependents except a widowed mother. The whole idea had
-pleased them so much—mother, father and son—that here they were, to
-look into the thing for themselves, to give and receive news, and to do
-a bit of incidental trading. They settled down in camp for a few days,
-and both hosts and visitors thoroughly enjoyed themselves.
-
-Negotiations proceeded apace, without hitch or difficulty, and at last
-were brought to a pleasant conclusion. The prize secured, a day was
-fixed for the departure of the bride and bridegroom and his people. Her
-treasures and possessions were packed on the sleds, and with many tears
-she said goodbye to the good folk of her own village.
-
-All seemed to augur well for the wedding journey. The sky was clear and
-the sun shone. The ice was perfect and the snow well packed and good
-for sled travelling. The dogs, rested and well fed, flew over the
-ground in high spirits. The sleeping houses built en route by the
-wooer’s party, proved to have remained intact; the frozen meat and
-blubber, buried beneath the floor in each of them, had not been
-disturbed.
-
-The first night was spent in singing. The young man gave a vocal
-account of the exploits of his tribe and of his own prowess in hunting,
-to an audience consisting of his admiring parents and the bride. All
-went merrily, too, the second day out; but after that, disaster
-overtook the party.
-
-They came to a stretch of newly formed ice, over which they must pass
-or make a long détour. They decided to risk the shorter way. The ice
-was very thin, so they got off the sleds and attempted the crossing on
-foot, each one at a stated distance from the other. Treading as lightly
-as possible, they started the venture, but, half-way across, a scream
-rang out, the ice broke, and the two women were engulfed in the icy
-current beneath. Lines were flung to them and a rescue effected,
-although they remained in imminent danger of being frozen. Prompt
-measures had to be taken. There was no shelter at hand, and no
-immediate means of making a fire. There was only the powdery snow! In
-this the half-drowned women were rolled and rubbed. The snow acted
-almost like blotting paper, and they were soon comparatively dry,
-although still perishingly cold. A shelter was quickly built for them
-and a lamp hastily lit. Their blankets were unrolled and they were
-snugly wrapped up in their capacious folds and put to sleep, to recover
-from the shock.
-
-The very next day, late in the afternoon, as they drew near their next
-sleeping place and were looking forward to a feast on the rations
-stored there, another disaster befell this ill-fated arctic wedding
-party. They actually sighted the wayside house and were driving right
-up to it, when a deep growl came from inside and, before they had time
-to descend or prepare for attack, a full sized polar bear rushed out
-and hurled himself upon them.
-
-The women fled and the men scattered, whilst the animal took possession
-of the sleds. All the spears and guns were lashed in place, so the
-refugees were unarmed and powerless. The bear, muttering and growling,
-tore the bales of provisions apart and feasted on the meat and blubber.
-While he was so engaged, one of the hunters, bolder than the rest,
-stalked his way up to one of the sleds and managed to secure a spear.
-Then he opened an attack on the highwayman, after the approved manner
-of bear-fighting.
-
-Crouching with poised weapon low on his haunches, he suddenly sprang up
-and began to sing and dance about, on this side and on that, but
-drawing nearer all the time to his astonished adversary. The bear
-became more and more bemused by the noise and the agility of the
-oncomer, until at last the latter was able to rush close in and strike
-him one fatal blow with the practised spear. Although the creature had
-rifled the travellers’ house and devoured their cache, it was now their
-turn to skin and eat him; and so accounts were squared.
-
-After this, the luck of the bride and bridegroom seemed to turn again,
-and the rest of the journey was accomplished in comfort and safety. The
-young woman settled down happily with the Fox Channel tribe into which
-she had married, and became a model wife under the vigilant eye of her
-husband’s mother.
-
-
-
-Having sketched something of the education the native children receive,
-and of the adult life and occupations of the tribe generally, the next
-thing to deal with is death, and the elaborate ritual of an Eskimo
-funeral.
-
-These people fear death, and the dying. Just before a man dies he is
-dragged outside the house or tent, so that his spirit may not haunt it.
-No dwelling where a death has taken place is ever re-occupied. Should
-anyone chance to die inside, all the possessions are held to be
-polluted and must be cast away.
-
-A corpse is sewn up in the deceased’s accustomed sleeping blanket,
-placed upon a hand sled, and hauled away to the chosen place of burial,
-followed by the members of the family and the relatives. It is laid
-upon the bare rock (the ground being frozen hard as iron, grave-digging
-is out of the question), and huge stones are piled around and upon it,
-like a cairn. In the case of a man, his weapons, drinking cup and
-knife, or these things in miniature, are placed beside him, his sled or
-a small model of it nearby, and he is buried with a little sort of doll
-representing a woman. In the case of a female, her needles, knife, cup,
-and a man doll, are laid beside her. Food is deposited on a flat rock
-near the pile, and the mourners sit down to eat a farewell meal with
-the spirit of the dead. Then they march in single file seven times
-round the cairn, following the direction of the sun, i.e., from east to
-west, chanting directions to the departed:—
-
-
- Innoserra arkiksimalarook: My life, pray let it be put right.
- Illooprakoole kissearne: Through that which is pleasant alone.
- Nakrook mallilugo: Through space following.
- Kaumâttevoot malliglo: Following that which gives light.
-
-
-The idea is that the spirit must follow the course of the sun, to guide
-it to the realms of bliss and light whence comes that glory, and
-whither it goes.
-
-The objects placed with the corpse under the stones are to assist and
-accompany the spirit on this journey.
-
-The word illooprakoole is a “spirit word,” used only in addressing
-spirits. It means a route through pleasant ways not beset by dangers.
-The same significance, in an ordinary mortal connection, is expressed
-by a different word altogether. Nakrook is another “spirit word,”
-meaning the Great-Air-Space-beyond-the-Earth. The ordinary word in
-everyday usage is Sillarlo. This spirit language used by the conjurors
-has its parallel in every case in ordinary parlance. The following are
-a few instances:—
-
-
- Ordinary Word Meaning. Spirit word used
- in everyday use. in conjurations.
-
- Netsuk A seal Angmeatseak
- Angakok A conjuror Takreoo
- Agakka The hand Issarkrateeka
- Sennayo One who works Issarrayo
- Aput Snow Nungooark
- Kyak Canoe Agfarkjuk
- Angoot A man Peyaktoiyo
- etc., etc.
-
-
-In the case of the burial of an unpopular or badly conducted man, the
-people walk round the cairn in the reverse direction, i.e., from west
-to east, with a different refrain. The idea being to direct the spirit
-away from the light and into outer darkness, their refrain begins with
-the words to the effect:—
-
-
- “Evil will always have evil.”
-
-
-All this is called the custom of the Kingarngtooktok.
-
-The mourners at length return to their village, and apparently forget
-all about the funeral, unless in the case of the deceased being of ill
-repute. Should the conjuror assert that his spirit has gone to the
-realms of Sedna (the Eskimo hell), gifts and offerings have to be
-collected in order that the necessary conjurations may effect his
-translation to some other abode (the Eskimo purgatory).
-
-The people much dislike to have their dead bodies devoured by dogs,
-lest their souls have to wander over the ice and land on vain hunting
-trips; but they do not object to wolves on the same score, since the
-wolves also devour the souls, and the departed, thus disposed of, will
-always hunt deer successfully and live on the meat. Neither do they
-object to the carrion-loving raven, as the soul in this case is also
-absorbed by the bird and provided for in perpetuity. It would indeed
-take a trained psychologist to determine wherein comes the distinction
-as between dogs and the other scavengers!
-
-On the anniversary of a death, the spirit of the deceased, good or bad,
-is supposed to return to the grave of its body, and is there met by its
-friends still in the flesh, who bring it offerings of food.
-
-On the return from a funeral the mourners march round the dead man’s
-dwelling from east to west, then entering, take a draught of water, for
-luck in sealing. The chief mourners neither leave the house nor work on
-any skins for three days in succession. Afterwards they throw away
-their clothes and abandon the dwelling. After a death the community
-should not wash or do their hair nor cut their nails for three days.
-Those who transgress this injunction are called Nuggatyauyoot, the
-disobedient. Nor are men allowed to have their stockings taken out of
-their boots and dried, for the Tarnuk (spirit) will kill them in that
-case.
-
-Unfathomable to the white man’s intelligence as many of these odd
-observances may be, the root idea will explain the general scope of
-them. The spirit of the deceased is earth-bound for three days, and if
-of an evil disposition when alive, is liable to do much mischief to his
-late family and friends. Earth-bound spirits are the Toopelât (pl.),
-the evil spirits of the dead. Hence the custom of haling the dying well
-outside the house. During the three following days, a knife edge,
-placed outwards, is set at the entrance of the igloo to prevent the
-spirit from returning, especially at night, and doing some
-injury—causing some pain, sickness or death—to the sleepers within.
-
-When an Eskimo community hears of a death in its midst, the husband on
-his return from sealing waits for the first quiet moment in his house,
-and then offers his wife the third finger of the right hand, to crook,
-and they say together, “Tokkoneangelagoot” (we shall not die). This is
-the custom of “Killaryo.” The children then come to the mother, and in
-turn she takes the third finger of each one’s left hand between her
-teeth and singes a little piece of the hair on the left temple of the
-child. The child is bidden to bite the mother’s jacket on the shoulder,
-and say “Sittatoot,” the mother answering with another formula of
-preservation. The writer has made every effort to get at the meaning of
-these doings, but they seem to have lost their original significance by
-now, and even the oldest natives fail to interpret them any more. They
-were probably some form of supplication against the entry into the body
-of the Spirit of Death.
-
-From much of the foregoing it will be seen that the Eskimo have a
-decided belief in the soul, the innua—the spiritual, immortal essence
-of man. Also that they have formed for themselves definite ideas about
-the after life, either in bliss, as a reward for good living, or in
-misery, as a punishment for evil—Good and Evil, of course, being
-tinctured by the cast and scope of the Eskimo mind and its standards of
-social life. There is little of ethical content in it all. The heaven
-and hell of Eskimo conception are gross and material. Heaven is a land
-of warmth and sunshine, with good hunting, absence of storms and hard
-seasons, and plenty of fat seals in its ice-free sea. Hell is the dark
-and bitter abode of the submarine Sedna, the enemy of man, who
-engineers bad weather and times of scarcity. Descriptive legends of her
-awful “house” abound among the tribes, showing a fancifulness and
-imagination fantastic as nightmare.
-
-To deal with the subject of the Eskimo religion, however, requires a
-chapter to itself. Its chief priests are the Conjurors, and its chief
-festival the Sedna ceremony.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XII
-
-THE ESKIMO LANGUAGE
-
-
-The Eskimo tongue requires a chapter to itself, for although it can
-boast of no literature—being until recently an unwritten language—it
-should have exceptional interest for the student of comparative
-philology. It is the speech of a primitive, untutored folk, yet its
-vocabulary is very large, its grammar complete, methodical and perfect,
-and its construction capable of expressing subtleties and combinations
-by inflection, unlike those of any tongue, springing from the
-well-known stocks of human speech. It is euphonic, agglutinative, and
-complex.
-
-Europeans find Eskimo difficult to acquire. The writer, like others,
-had largely to construct his own grammar when studying it. He spent
-many long hours, first with the young folk to get the purity of the
-sounds, then with the middle-aged men to arrive at correct idiom and
-fluency, then with the ancients to get at the folk lore of the tribe.
-Oftentimes their speech was merely a series of long and complicated
-gutturals, two hours of it being enough to make a man’s head spin for
-the rest of the day. But labour and pertinacity were at length
-rewarded; the language was mastered, and the minds of the arctic people
-revealed.
-
-The romance of this grammar consists in the fact that it has all been
-marshalled and classified, and reduced to a system which will bear
-comparison with even the classic tongues. Unless the first missionaries
-to the arctic had taken up this virgin and inchoate subject and handled
-it by the aid of the centuries of culture to which they were heir,
-Eskimo speech must have still remained a sealed book to the
-philologist, and—what is of far more importance—presented a Hill of
-Difficulty for years to all those who should come after them in the
-same ministry. With the aid of the grammars and dictionaries so
-patiently and thoughtfully compiled in the dark, unknown and bitter
-North, the would-be evangelist to-day may prepare himself for work
-among the Eskimo in the merest fraction of the time it took the first
-Danish envoys from civilisation.
-
-The original attempt was made by the well-known Danish pastor, Hans
-Egede, who went to Greenland with his wife in 1721, and lived there
-among the natives for many years. Eskimo was the mother-tongue of their
-son, born in the country as one of its own people. In time, this lad
-was sent to Denmark to study at the University of Copenhagen. On his
-return to Greenland, young Egede applied himself to the scientific
-study of the language he knew so intimately, and to the compilation of
-a grammar and a dictionary. His example was followed by the teachers
-who came after him, some of them being German linguists imbued with the
-meticulous love of learning and of intellectual conquest the task
-seemed preeminently to require. These tracked down and classified the
-many meanings of Eskimo inflection and expression, and perfected their
-system of interpretation. Hence, of course, the thoroughly Teutonic
-mould into which the syntax of the Eskimo tongue has been thrown.
-
-All this work has formed the basis of study for everybody who has had
-occasion to learn the language since, although such an undertaking has
-always entailed a new and personal effort to work out the grammar and
-compile a local vocabulary. For all students of Eskimo, including the
-present writer, find a variety of dialects, although generally it may
-be said that the language varies so inconsiderably from one region to
-another, that hunters from widely different parts of the arctics can
-soon—by mutual questionings—understand each other. Those in Greenland
-speak practically the same tongue as those in Alaska.
-
-Apropos of the purely etymological aspect of this little known
-language, it is interesting to recall an observation made by Dean
-Farrar in a lecture before the Royal Institution, delivered in 1869. “I
-hardly hesitate to prophesy,” he said, “the extreme probability that
-the final answer to many high scientific problems regarding the nature
-and the origin of man may come from enquiries into the languages of
-nations such as these (the Chinese, Eskimo and Cherokee) rather than
-from any other branch of ... palaeontological research.”
-
-Eskimo has indeed received some measure of study and analysis, and it
-is for grammarians to tell us whether or no this prophesy has been to
-any extent fulfilled. A French writer, M. Hovelaque, hesitates to
-answer any question as to what group of human language the
-“hyperborean” tongues should be assigned. His observations should be
-recorded here perhaps, by way of a commentary on the exhaustiveness
-with which the Germans seem to have gone into the subject: “Au surplus
-le nom d’hyperboréennes ou arctiques, sous lequel on réunit ces
-differentes langues, ne doit pas donner le change sur le plus ou moins
-d’affinité soit entre elles, soit avec autres idiomes. Bien des
-hypothèses sont encore permises à ce sujet, mais il est vraisemblable
-qu’un certain nombre de ces idiomes résisteront à toutes les tentatives
-que l’on pourra faire en vue de les laisser parmi tel ou tel groupe
-suffisament connu. Il serait dangereux, en tout cas, d’accorder aux
-relations des missionaires sur telle ou telles de ces langues,
-notamment sur celles des Esquimaux, plus de crédit qu’il ne convient.
-On n’y trouve, le plus souvent, que des rapprochements de mots, des
-etymologies; en somme rien de scientifique. Ajutons, d’autre part, que
-certains idiomes hyperboréens ont été étudiés avec soin et par des
-auteurs compétents, ainsi qu’on peut le voir dans les publications de
-l’Academie de Petersbourg.” (La Linguistique. Bibliothèque des Sciences
-contemporains.)
-
-Up to within recent times the Eskimo had no system of writing. But
-another patient evangelist, inspired by the necessity of delivering the
-message of Christianity in a more permanent form than by oral teaching
-only, invented what is known as the Syllabic Character for the benefit
-of the Indians, at a post called Norway House. This was the Rev. James
-Evans, a minister of the Canadian Methodist Church. The Syllabic
-Character, which is a sound (and not a letter, or alphabetical)
-writing, similar to shorthand, was designed for the Cree, but proved to
-be easily adaptable to represent the Eskimo speech. Without such a
-method, it is difficult to imagine how restless and roving tribes, at
-this post to-day and gone to-morrow, could ever have been taught to
-read. By this means, however, an ordinarily intelligent individual can
-learn in eight or nine weeks.
-
-The principle of Mr Evans’ characters is phonetic. There are no silent
-letters. Each character represents a syllable; hence no spelling is
-required. As soon as the series of signs—about sixty in number—are
-mastered, and a few additional secondary signs (some of which represent
-consonants and some aspirates, and some partially change the sound of
-the main character), the native scholar of eighty or of six years of
-age can begin to read, and in a few days attain surprising accuracy.
-
-Such results as these, such gifts of pure intellectual effort, are
-surely among the greatest blessings civilisation has to confer on the
-few primitive peoples still left in the world.
-
-Of late years the British and Foreign Bible Society have taken charge
-of the work, and now the Gospel in Cree, Syllabic and Eskimo is widely
-spread.
-
-The Syllabic Character is known far and wide to-day in the arctics. It
-has not been spread solely by white men, for the people teach each
-other as they travel from tribe to tribe. The Eskimo freely write
-letters to their friends and hand them over for delivery to anyone
-taking a journey in the desired direction. The letters always reach
-their destination, because the postman at his first sleeping place
-invariably reads them all through from first to last; so that if, as
-often happens, one or two should get lost, the addressee receives the
-missive by word of mouth; and incidentally the postman knows
-everybody’s business and is altogether the most glorious gossip who
-could ever drop in and enliven the circle round the igloo lamp of a
-winter’s night.
-
-Pen, ink and paper, it may be noted, are innovations of the new
-civilisation. Prior to the advent of the white man the only idea and
-the only means of calligraphy the Eskimo had was the etching on ivory
-or bone. Many vigorous and spirited drawings exist of hunting or other
-scenes, scratched on blade or handle, and sharply bitten in, black and
-clear, by rubbing with soot from the lamps. It is not remarkable that a
-knowledge of writing and reading should have spread among the people in
-this way, for the Eskimo are avid of instruction, and eagerly avail
-themselves of any opportunity of being taught. Where Christianity
-itself has gained a footing it has been largely through the
-instrumentality of some among them who have come in contact with
-missionaries, and passed on to others all they had seen and heard.
-
-One of the most puzzling aspects of Eskimo is its “agglutinative”
-character. The words all run together. All the parts of speech may be
-joined to the verbal root and then conjugated in its various moods and
-tenses, so that the word finally produced by this process may be sixty
-or more syllables long. Students find the principal difficulty, not so
-much in building up and saying these peculiar words, but in correctly
-understanding what the natives say.
-
-The following lengthy remark will illustrate three things: first, a
-characteristic mood and tense of the verb “to flee”; secondly, the
-phonetic characters used; and, thirdly, the composite nature of the
-word.
-
-
- 1. Kemâyomaneangelara = I shall not wish to flee from him.
- 2. ᑭᒪᔪᒪᓂᐊᖏᓚᕋ
- 3. Ke-mâ-yo-ma-ne-â-ng-ge-lâ-ra.
-
-
-The Eskimo tongue has a full complement of the parts of speech. There
-is no definite article, but the numeral adjective one, attousik, takes
-its place; e.g., attousik angoot, a man, i.e., one man.
-
-There is no form to express gender. Sex is distinguished by the word
-“man” or “woman” (really male or female) added to another noun; as
-kingmuk, a dog; arngnak, a woman; angoot, a man. Kingmuk arngnak, a
-female dog; kingmuk angoot, a male dog.
-
-In many cases where English admits of only one word for an animal,
-Eskimo has several. A deer is a deer in English all the year round; in
-Eskimo it has a different name for its growth or habits at certain
-seasons, as in the fawning period, etc.
-
-The noun plays an important part in the sentence on account of the
-various affixes which may be attached. It is inflected for number, and
-for no less than nine cases (rendered by prepositions in translation);
-it draws possessive pronouns and some adjectives to itself as a magnet
-draws iron filings; it has moreover a transitive and an emphatic form.
-At the risk of writing a chapter which might be taken from an Eskimo
-Primer, we venture to give examples of some of these intricacies of the
-snow folks’ strange speech, since whatever else it may be, this can
-scarcely be called a hackneyed subject! So the transitive form of the
-noun is used when it is the subject of a transitive verb:—
-
-Ernipta nagligevâtegoot = our son, (he) loves us.
-
-The emphatic form:—
-
-Angootib erninne nagligeva = the man loves his own son.
-
-There are three numbers—singular, dual and plural:—Noonak, a land;
-noonâk, two lands; noonât, lands; and each of these is declined with
-different endings to express eight cases translated by the nominative
-and vocative, and then “of,” “to,” “in,” “through,” “from,” and “like”
-a land. We feel we are getting on to firm ground somewhere when it is
-possible to note down such a rule as this: “Nouns in the singular end
-either in a vowel or in the consonants k and t. The dual always ends in
-k, and the plural in t.”
-
-We must not part with the noun unceremoniously. Its possibilities are
-not easily exhausted. It must have cost a good deal of thinking,
-originally, to get it into grammatical harness. For nouns of different
-kinds have different terminations, which add all sorts of ideas to
-their isolated meaning. For instance, kut, a family; innuk, an Eskimo;
-innukut, the family of an Eskimo. Vik, time or place, and kooveasook,
-rejoicing; hence kooveasookvik, a place of rejoicing. Again, katte, a
-companion, and nerre, to eat; hence nerrekattega, my table companion,
-ga being the possessive pronoun.
-
-The possessive pronouns, indicated by inflection, include “our two,”
-“your two,” and “their two.” There is also a possessive emphatic form
-of the noun, his “own” son.
-
-The Eskimo have names for the numerals up to six, after which figure
-they use a system of addition and multiplication to express number.
-Seven, for instance, is six and one; nineteen is ten and eight and one.
-The figure ten is arrived at as being the count of a man’s fingers on
-two hands; twenty includes his toes. Eighty is translated by “Men four,
-their extremities finished.” It must indeed have been a matter of some
-mild philological exhilaration to the first translators when they
-arrived at such a conclusion as this!
-
-Then there are the verbs. This part of speech may be almost called the
-whole of the Eskimo tongue. It annexes both subject and object, and can
-express through various particles a sentence which would require in
-English half a dozen or even ten words. There are two kinds of verbs,
-transitive and intransitive; three Voices, active, passive, and middle;
-the usual Moods, of which one—the subjunctive—lends itself to an
-interesting inferential sort of meaning. When the person addressed can
-form some idea of what the speaker wants or means, without the use of
-the principal verb, this moods comes into play: “Because there are no
-partridges,” is the sentence; “I didn’t get any,” is the inference.
-“Because I am very hungry” leaves it to be inferred “therefore I want
-some food.” When this is confined to the obvious, well and good; it
-would scarcely be so clear, “Because the house is very warm” therefore
-“you must make it cooler,” unless the conversation took place in a snow
-house where conviviality was having a disastrous effect on the roof and
-the walls.
-
-The verb has participles and tenses, which have many modifications of
-meaning with no equivalent except an entire sentence in English. In
-narration, there is an extraordinarily graphic past, not adequately
-rendered by “When So-and-So lived;” but “in So-and-So’s own time of
-being in the world.” There are impersonal verbs, and irregular verbs,
-and all sorts of particles; potential (I can do a thing), optative (I
-wish to do it), negative (I do not do it), the proper “sorting out” of
-which is half the battle of learning Eskimo. Time is expressed by time
-particles placed between the verb and the verbal termination; there are
-also verbal and adverbial particles which have fixed rules as to
-position, always preceding the time particle. Thus, a word may be
-elaborated, such as Tikkenarsuakpok, “He-endeavours-to-arrive,” or
-Tikkenarsuatsinakpok, “He-endeavours-always-to-arrive;” and
-“I-indeed-hear-you,” or “I-indeed-hear-only-you.”
-
-It would be perhaps superfluous to offer further notes on the Eskimo
-tongue, since the foregoing will suffice to give some idea of its scope
-and complexity. The syntax falls under two headings, the formation of
-compound words and the arrangement of these into sentences. The
-position of words in a sentence, particularly a short one, may be
-changed without altering the sense. It is no part of the present
-writer’s purpose to do more, here, than to sketch the briefest outline
-of one whole section of his subject. To do justice to this language
-would require very considerable space. Again, there is no particular
-object in adding a chart of the syllabic characters, which are purely
-arbitrary, have no history beyond that already given, and belong in no
-sense to the genius of the Eskimo themselves. The only recommendation
-they might have—if the general reader could pronounce them—is that they
-far more nearly give the sounds of what is really a flowing and not
-unmusical tongue than the barbaric conglomeration of outlandish
-consonants and double vowels which, as a poor expedient, represent to
-the eye only, Eskimo words in our inadequate letters. It is for this
-reason that we have so often given, in the foregoing pages, only the
-translation and not the Eskimo words themselves. In Roman characters
-they convey a hideous idea to the eye, and a still worse idea to the
-ear.
-
-It is for the future to reveal whether or no the newly found gift of
-writing will lead these people on to extensive literature. The
-Moravians have published some well known books, such as “Christie’s Old
-Organ,” etc. If so, by the analogy of every literature in the world, it
-will begin with verse, by the enshrining of the folk tales immemorially
-dear to every nation, and by the composition of some sort of Eskimo
-saga. The Greenland Eskimos composed long songs in honour of Fridtjof
-Nansen before he took leave of them, after the first crossing of their
-icy continent. It may be that these Eskimo poems, printed in his book,
-together with Dr. Rink’s collection of “Tales and Traditions of the
-Eskimo,” and Dr. Boas’ similar collection of the fables of this people
-(“The Central Eskimo”) and the present writer’s contribution to the
-same subject, constitute so far the bulk of the offering made by these
-children of the arctic to the literature of mankind.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIII
-
-LEGENDS
-
-
-There exists among the Baffin Islanders, as among all the other tribes,
-one long consecutive legend in particular, which should rank, if not
-with the great Scandinavian and Icelandic Sagas beloved of William
-Morris and of Wagner, at least with some of the most picturesque of
-Grimm’s immortal fairy tales, and certainly with any of the strange and
-monstrous legends of Kalevala, the Finnish cycle of national song.
-
-Students of national story-telling will probably find analogies and
-relationships between the Eskimo story of “Sedna” and the
-characteristic folk tales of the other arctic or sub-arctic peoples
-east and west. “Sedna” is beguiled into marriage by a gallant hunter
-who is really not a man at all, but a sea bird. This sort of tragedy,
-or disillusionment, is common in Eskimo fable. In one Alaskan-Eskimo
-tale, the heroine marries the human semblance of a bear.
-
-The Sedna legend—a religious legend around which turns a large volume
-of Eskimo superstition—has its repulsive as well as its poetic aspects.
-But to one who has lived intimately with these people, it would seem
-that so strange and awesome a story of the wild north as the tragedy
-and death of Sedna should be set, in song, to the metre of Kalevala and
-Hiawatha. It is the metre of a child-like version of adventures
-happening to a child-like folk.
-
-Belief in this legend, in the existence and the power of Sedna, a
-maleficent sea-goddess of the underworld, forms a large part of the
-Eskimo religion, and the annual autumnal festival arising out of it is
-the principal celebration in their calendar. In connection with this
-phantasy, it is noteworthy that the Eskimo conception of the spirit of
-evil—or at least of hostility to man—is unlike that of any other
-nation. The Eskimo devil is a woman.
-
-The Eskimos are great story-tellers, and the bulk of their fables,
-handed down by oral tradition from generation to generation, has
-assumed a stereotyped form. Their narration demands the exercise of an
-art in which the arctic folk excel—the art of vivid narration. Many of
-these tales begin as recitatives; some are almost wholly related in
-verse or musical form; others are told in prose, with every sort of
-appropriate gesture, modulation of the voice, and facial expression. A
-number of them are onomatopoeic in character, imitating the calls and
-cries of the birds and creatures of the wild. Story-telling is one of
-the principal features of the social life of these people of the north,
-and bulks largely in the programme of all festivities.
-
-Many of the Eskimo legends would require a certain amount of
-bowdlerising before they could be presented to the world as a book of
-Eskimo tales, a contribution to the folk lore of the nations; but some
-of them (notably the well dramatised story of the migration of the
-Saglingmiut, with its very essence of primitive arctic life) could be
-retold intact. Ethnologists have made a fairly representative
-collection of these stories in the course of the past fifty years, and
-most of them are to be found in the bibliography of arctic travel.
-Those incidental to these pages, with the exception, of course, of the
-Sedna tradition, are fresh contributions to the subject, not included,
-to the best of the writer’s belief, in any other work.
-
-An amusing tale, related to the writer, is that of the amorous youth
-who made a particularly disappointing mistake.
-
-In a certain village there lived a lovely maiden with her father. She
-possessed little but a happy disposition and a ready smile. The old man
-himself was so poor that his one dream of the future turned on the hope
-of his daughter securing a first-class hunter for a husband, who would
-provide for the two of them ever after. No young man, attracted by the
-girl’s bright eyes, was made welcome over the lamp in that igloo unless
-her father satisfied himself as to his credentials. But, as luck will
-have it apparently all the world over, the daughter’s love was won by
-the most ineligible suitor of them all—a youth poor in everything but
-in courage and hope and promise. The old man rejected all his overtures
-and rudely denied him his daughter. So the two were driven to form
-plans of their own.
-
-They decided to run away together, and that she should merely feign
-resistance when her lover arrived to carry her off. The night came for
-the attempt. The old man and the girl retired to rest as usual, rolled
-up in their blankets on the sleeping bench, and the lamp burnt low.
-Now, the approach to their abode was across a neck of ice spanning a
-deep ravine. The youth came along, and cautiously crept over the narrow
-bridge. Quickly entering the igloo, and perceiving the two sleeping
-forms, he snatched up one of them, furs and all, and rushed back whence
-he had come. To evade all possibility of pursuit, he smashed down the
-ice bridge behind him. Then, burning to look upon the face of his
-bride, he drew the blankets from about her head—only to discover with
-the utmost consternation that he had carried off the father instead of
-the girl! Dropping his burden none too gently, he made off at top speed
-and fled into the night. The story-teller failed to draw upon his
-imagination as to what happened in the domestic circle thus
-disastrously broken up, after that.
-
-To return, however, to the chief of the legends—the legend of Sedna:
-
-There was, once upon a time, a beautiful Eskimo girl, called Sedna. She
-was her widowed father’s only daughter, and they abode together by the
-sea shore. As she grew up she was wooed by many a youth of her own
-tribe, and of others who came from afar. But to no single one of her
-lovers did her heart incline in the least. She refused altogether to
-marry. She had a proud spirit and delighted in disdain. At last,
-however, a day came when a very handsome young hunter appeared upon the
-scene, from a far-off strange country. Neither Sedna nor Anguta, her
-father, had ever heard of him before. He had beautiful skins cunningly
-wrought with a stripe in the coat, and a spear of ivory. His kyak drove
-inshore over the shining sea; but instead of landing on the beach, he
-poised it on the edge of the surf and called to the maiden in her tent
-above the strand to come off to him. He wooed her with an enticing
-song: “Come to me; come into the land of the birds, where there is
-never hunger, where my tent is made of the most beautiful skins. You
-shall rest on soft bearskins.... Your lamp shall always be filled with
-oil, your pot with meat.”
-
-Sedna, framed in the entrance of the leathern hangings, refused. She
-would not come down. Wholly won at first sight, maidenlike she must
-refuse! So he began to plead and woo. He drew for her a picture of the
-home where he would take her, the rich furs that he would give, and the
-necklaces of ivory. Even though she vowed she wanted no husband, let
-her come down with her bag, her sealskin sack of treasures, and fly
-with him! Sedna made the coy boast, “Am I not the only one who does not
-want a husband?” but even as she said it, her hand fell from the tent
-flap and she stepped down towards the sea. “Let my bag be brought....”
-
-He placed her aboard his kyak and paddled off on his return journey. So
-Sedna went away with her lover and her father saw her no more on the
-cliff by the seashore that was her home.
-
-Came swift awakening and a bride’s tears! Sedna’s lover was no man at
-all, but a phantom man whose real self was a Bird! One of those
-peerless creatures of the arctic sky who, with “wide wing ...
-broad-spread to glide upon the free blue road” above the crashing
-floes, wheels over the bitter waters of the North. Some have it a
-Fulmar, and some a Loon. It was a Spirit bird, having power to
-transform itself into the semblance of a human thing. Falling in love
-with the maiden, it had taken the form of the hunter and decoyed her to
-its own.
-
-Sedna was inconsolable. She had the horror of a very human girl at her
-strange mate, and could by no means make his land her home and his
-people hers. The legend has it that the Loon provided for her as an
-ordinary hunter would have done; but she was wild and homesick, and
-passed her days bewailing, as lone and desolate an exiled maiden as
-ever cried, “Woe, woe!”
-
-(Sedna’s disillusionment is a note in the story wholly coarse to
-European ideas. The Eskimos are a people without prudery. A perfectly
-natural incident on the journey revealed that the lover was a bird.)
-
-But the father wearied for his daughter—the Eskimo word has the loving
-possessive “his own daughter”—and at length fitted out his boat and
-sailed away to that distant coast whither she had been borne. The
-husband Bird was from home when he came to this land, and it was a sad
-and sorry tale that greeted his ears from the wind-lashed, spray-beaten
-maiden that had been his smiling, contented child. Without more ado, he
-lifted her into his boat, made one swift turn, and fell to retracing
-his course. The craft—a tiny mark—was soon lost to sight in the welter
-of the waves.
-
-Then the Loon, returning, enquired and said, “But where is my wife?”
-The cry echoed round the naked cliffs. And answering cries, wind-borne
-on the darkening air, told him that his wife had fled. Her father had
-come and snatched her back, in grief and anger, to his bosom.
-
-At once, the Bird, assuming the Phantom form again, followed in his
-kyak; but when the Father saw him coming he covered up his daughter
-with the furs and things he had loaded in the boat. Swiftly the kyaker
-bore down upon them, and rushing alongside demanded to see his wife.
-
-“Let me see my wife!” he cried. “Let me only see her; pray let me see
-her!”
-
-The angry father refused, and held determinedly on his way.
-
-“Then let me see her hands only. I only ask to see her hands!” the
-Kokksaut cried, to be passionately rejected again.
-
-Then, bowing his head over the opening of his kyak in grief and
-desolation, the kyaker fell behind. He had failed! His manhood had
-failed; Sedna had hated and left as true a lover as ever a man could
-have been to her, and he would no more of it! With one wild sweep of
-his wings, he was a bird again, the kyak a mote upon the waters
-beneath, and a stroke or two of his great vans brought him above the
-boat of the fugitives. He hung there awhile, uttering the strange cry
-of the Loon; but at last dropped away into the darkness.
-
-Then there arose a storm—a black arctic storm—out at sea.
-
-And Sedna’s father was stricken with fear. Terror of the bird-man
-gripped his heart. Terror of the offended powers of sky and sea nerved
-him to a bitter sacrifice. The raging waves demanded Sedna, and he must
-give her up, and repulse her struggling, and see her drown. He bent
-forward, and with one fearful thrust, cast his daughter out of the
-boat—so to propitiate the offended sea!
-
-The wild, white face rose to the surface, and despairing hands caught
-at the gunwale. But the Terror was not to be defrauded, and the father,
-frenzied with grief and the desperate determination of his deed,
-snatched up an axe—a heavy thing of ivory and wood—and brought it down
-upon those pathetic, clinging fingers. The maiden fell back into the
-sea (and the first joints of her maimed and bleeding hands turned into
-seals). But, coming up again, with agony in her eyes she made another
-struggle to catch at the boat. Three times the drowning creature came
-back; but she was the doomed victim of the sea, and the father must
-consummate the sacrifice. Three times he smote and chopped at her
-mangled hands. (The second joints became the ojuk, the ground seals;
-the third joints made the walrus; and whales sprang of the rest.)
-
-Apropos of this reeking legend, it must be borne in mind that the
-Eskimo believe implicitly in Spirits and in their power to demand
-sacrifice. The father, believing the storm to be an expression of the
-anger of the Sea god (on behalf apparently of the sea-bird) and a
-demand for the daughter he had reclaimed, did not hesitate to give her
-up and to steel himself against her drowning agony.
-
-At last Sedna sank, to rise no more.
-
-And the storm sank, too. The boat presently came to land. The father
-entered his tent and lay down beneath it and slept a sleep of
-exhaustion and overspent grief. In the tent was fastened Sedna’s dog.
-But that night there was a high tide which washed up the beach,
-demolished the tupik, and drowned the two living creatures within. So
-that man and dog rejoined the maiden in the depths of the sea. There
-they have dwelt ever since, in some “house” or cave of Eskimo
-imagination. There they preside over one whole region—called
-Adlivun—where souls are imprisoned for punishment for a while or all
-time, after death.
-
-The sea creatures who owe their origin to Sedna belong to her and she
-controls them. She protects them, and causes the storms which bring
-wreckage and famine to the kyakers and sealers. Hence she is in Eskimo
-mythology inimical to mankind, the source of the worst evils they know,
-a spirit who has to be propitiated or quelled by ceremony, as the case
-may be.
-
-She is considered to be of enormous stature, with two plaits of hair,
-each thick as an arm, and she has only one eye. The other was pierced
-and put out in her drowning struggle.
-
-The writer has seen an example of this sort of sacrifice in actual
-life, and it redeems the story of Sedna’s father from the senseless
-selfishness of which it seems to be compounded by some narrators. Two
-boats containing a party of hunters were returning from sealing, when a
-squall struck them. Before sail could be taken in, one boat overturned
-and the men were thrown into the water. They all climbed back except
-one, who was numbed with cold and dazed with shock. He did not sink
-immediately, being held up by his deerskins. He even drifted close by
-the boat, and easily within reach. One man, indeed, did reach out and
-touch him with an oar, but when he failed to grasp it the general
-decision was to let him drown. He was “material for the Tongak”
-spirits, claimed by the Spirit of the sea—as was Sedna in the legend.
-He simply drowned in the sight of the others, and of the women on
-shore, who covered their faces with their hoods and gave the death
-wails, i.e., began to shriek and howl in the frenzied manner proper to
-the circumstances.
-
-It is possible that no better story than that of Sedna (with all its
-elements of phantasy, human emotion, poetry and savagery) could be
-found in illustration of a good deal Dr. Marrett has to tell us in his
-“Psychology and Folk Lore,” by way of reducing primitive folk-lore and
-primitive procedure (religious or medical, or both, arising out of it)
-to a science of primitive psychology. His masterly analysis of the
-outlook of the wholly untutored mind on the phenomena of cause and
-effect demonstrates quite clearly the sincerity and the obviousness of
-the “savage” rites and customs which seem to us so barbaric, irrelevant
-and monstrous.
-
-The Sedna myth gives rise to the taboo, and the practices of the Sedna
-ceremony. The aboriginal theory of things (the origin of the sea
-creatures, the cause of storms, etc.), leads to aboriginal methods of
-dealing with them “On (close) acquaintance, such as perhaps is to be
-obtained only on the field,” says Dr. Marrett, “the savage turns out to
-be anything but a fool, more especially in anything that relates at all
-directly to the daily struggle for existence ... common sense is no
-monopoly of civilisation,” although the educated application of it to
-the material and spiritual needs of life may easily be so. The interest
-of the primitive theurgist is a practical one, and the elements in his
-problem are only two, namely, a supernormal power to be moved and a
-traditional rite that promises to move it. The special function of the
-conjuror or the medicine man among aboriginal peoples is to grapple
-with the abnormal, and “this ever tends to constitute for the savage a
-distinct dispensation, a world of its own.” There is in such a story as
-the Sedna legend some groundwork of common sense and verifiable
-experience; and in the practices which arise out of it, this has to be
-taken into account, together with some very real occult content
-(whether of suggestion or hypnotism, the most modern of sciences alone
-could say), and some conscious fraud no doubt on the part of the
-conjurors.
-
-Prior, however, to an account of this ceremony, it will be as well
-perhaps to devote some space to the conjurors themselves. For, among
-the Eskimo, as among other primitive peoples, the typical “medicine
-man” is a specialist, trained for his vocation and initiated into an
-exclusive guild. He is by no means necessarily a fraud and a charlatan.
-Normally, the primitive faith healer has as much faith in himself and
-his methods as his patients have, and between the two of them—when it
-is a question of a mental reaction to be obtained—there is no reason
-why absolute success should not crown his efforts. In the sphere of
-material results these amazing methods seem to be wholly empirical, and
-yet it cannot be denied that the Eskimo conjurors sometimes produce
-effects comparable only to some of the well-known demonstrations of the
-“magic” of the East.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIV
-
-THE CONJURORS
-
-
-The greatly esteemed profession of Conjuror is open among the Eskimo to
-both men and women. Anyone is eligible to become a student in the rites
-and lore of the caste, but only those who pass its tests (i.e., only
-those who attain, not only a really high degree of the power of mental
-concentration, of intuition and character reading; but some true occult
-gift), are allowed to practise. The art has its own hierarchy of
-professors according to their degree of aptitude and initiation. Only
-those with some particular qualification, natural or acquired, such as
-the power of throwing themselves into true trance, attain the highest
-degree of dignity. Aspirants to the position of conjuror who fall short
-of this, but have yet studied and schooled themselves to some purpose
-in the art, are not denied its practice altogether, but hold lesser
-rank and officiate on minor occasions.
-
-The would-be conjuror is put through a fairly long and fairly severe
-course of training, the whole of which, wrapped up in an immense amount
-of magical circumlocution and sheer imposture, simply tends to enhance
-his intellectual qualities, such as they may be, at the expense of the
-grosser appetites of the Eskimo lay individual.
-
-The candidates to the caste—youth or young woman—begins by choosing a
-conjuror—male or female—under whom to study. And immediately the
-neophyte enters upon his apprenticeship. The length of time this may
-last rests upon his capacity to learn the rites and acquire the
-psychological stock-in-trade of a conjuror. It is to the teacher’s
-advantage to spin out this period of tuition as long as possible, since
-for the whole term of his training the disciple is the body servant of
-the master, and performs for him even the most menial offices. The
-novice is a sort of articled pupil into the bargain. He pays for his
-initiation.
-
-First of all, he has to acknowledge all his breaches of the communal
-law and custom, and confess to the conjuror whatever of wrongdoing
-there may have been in his life. The Eskimo believe in this sort of
-confession, and it is frequently enjoined. He receives forgiveness, and
-thereupon embarks upon a wholly new course of life.
-
-Fasting and abstinence and the mastery of the appetites of eating and
-drinking are the first trials, and the first victories he has to win.
-The Eskimo are vast eaters, and so much of their diet being flesh meat
-and in the raw state, their physique tends to grossness. This grossness
-has to be remedied if the conjuror is to be capable of dominating other
-minds by the greater force and clarity of his own. The neophyte eschews
-all luxuries whilst learning, again, of course, with the idea of
-self-command and of that detachment from the unnecessary things of life
-which—under civilised conditions also—hang so many trammels round a
-finer aspiration. In the terms of Eskimo experience, this involves
-allowing the hair to grow long and hang down; to eat with the hands
-covered; and to go to rest without discarding the clothes. The strict
-diet, the austerities, the real course of mental training, improve the
-candidate’s natural powers of mind, enhance his memory, and concentrate
-his will and consolidate so solid a belief in the system and powers he
-is attaining that the graduate has really, at last, something
-professional and exclusive to offer the community.
-
-To begin with, the aspirant has to become absolutely familiar with all
-the ancient customs of the people, and their significance. Then he has
-to study the spirit language, the tongue of the conjurors—that is to
-say, the language in which spirits are to be addressed and in which
-they express themselves through the initiate. He proceeds to study the
-cause of sickness (this however in a superstitious and not a natural
-sense), and what penalties to inflict for the wrongdoing which sickness
-is supposed to indicate. He has to learn all the various incantations
-for various occasions, and exactly how to set about them.
-
-All this is merely the first stage of his apprenticeship. He begins to
-show of what stuff he is made, so far as the career of conjuror is
-concerned, when it comes to dealing with matters of guilt and secrecy.
-The accomplished conjuror must be able to detect and affix guilt. Here
-he is concerned entirely with the minds of his fellow men, and trying
-to fathom and read them. The Eskimo mind is as tortuous as the Eastern.
-The conjuror pursues his own method, which may have a good deal to
-recommend it in the eyes of those who have made a study of the occult,
-but which is not the method of direct evidence and deduction. He throws
-himself into a perfectly genuine trance, and stakes everything on the
-intuitions of that state and the awesome effect of it upon the
-interested beholders.
-
-To do this the conjuror sits down with his face to the wall, and
-drawing his hood well over his features, rocks himself backwards and
-forwards, calling the while on his familiar spirit (his Tongak) to come
-to him. He continues this howling and rocking until such concentration
-of mind is effected that he becomes unconscious; he foams at the mouth.
-Whilst in this condition of self-induced hypnotism—or however the
-spiritists may explain it—his spirit, it is believed, goes below to
-Sedna, or above to the regions of beatitude, to find out what has been
-the cause of the guilt in question, and discover the requisite
-punishment.
-
-The interesting thing about this performance is that it is by no means
-the tissue of imposture one might suppose. The Eskimo conjuror may be
-no more and no less a fraud than the medium of a spiritistic séance.
-The writer has been creditably assured by these practitioners that the
-trance ensues in the vision of a great white light (like the light
-thrown on a sheet by the magic lantern), and then in that illumination
-they see the whole scene of the supposed crime re-enacted, all the
-people implicated in it, and its every detail. They are told, or
-inspired, what penalty to inflict. On returning to consciousness, the
-vision is not forgotten, but sharply remembered. The conjuror is able
-to accuse the offender, to question him, and extort a confession from
-him. The penalty generally takes the form of some obnoxious task to be
-performed or some fine to be paid in kind.
-
-This power to see the white light and to project in it the thoughts,
-probably, of the assistants at the conjuration—for the performance,
-when genuine, amounts to nothing less—is really a remarkable psychic
-feat. Probably the conjurors understand it as little as the laity; they
-have only trained themselves to achieve it, and they explain it
-according to the fantastic body of superstition which constitutes the
-Eskimo religion. It is only after long practice and the sustained
-effort after great mental concentration that the manifestation is
-attained, that the light can be seen, and incidents recorded in it.
-This is the final test for the honours of full conjurorship. The
-candidates sit night after night with the teacher, faces to the wall,
-and the lamps burning low, shutting out all extraneous objects and
-distractions, in the endeavour to see the light, to pass into trance.
-Those who remain for ever unable to arrive at this, fail to pass the
-test, and are rejected from the class of the full-fledged. They must
-content themselves with minor dignities in the order of conjurors. One
-of these inferior grades is that of the Kunneyo, the one who incants
-for the seal hunters. Another is the Makkosâktok, the one who goes
-round with the whip during the Sedna ceremonies; and a third is the
-Noonageeksaktok, another official at the great annual celebration.
-
-On the completion of his training and on his passing the final test for
-the witch-doctorate, the candidate is publicly acknowledged as a
-Conjuror. He makes a visitation of all the dwellings in the settlement,
-performs incantations in each, and receives in payment a number of
-charms, such as small pieces of carved ivory or bits of deerskin
-fringes. These things are valueless in themselves, but signify that the
-tribesfolk have accepted the new conjuror.
-
-It is easy to see how the conjurors acquire the power they undoubtedly
-have over the people, and easy to imagine how much of fraud,
-imposition, hypocrisy and sheer self-seeking could be practised under
-the thick cloak of their rites, incantations, superstitions, and—last,
-but not least—their clever trickery and legerdemain. What may be
-perhaps not quite so easy is to convey to the reader an idea of the
-real good faith and of some demonstrable if inexplicable occult command
-underlying much of the conjuror’s art. The whole subject is too big,
-either from the point of view of primitive superstitions and procedure,
-or from that of occultism, to be dealt with at much length here and
-now; but by way of illustrating the point that the Eskimo conjuror can
-perform miracles (collective hypnotism?) as striking as the well-known
-Eastern trick of the mango-tree, one of the incidents of the Sedna
-ceremony may be instanced.
-
-At a certain stage of the Sedna proceedings, the conjuror, who has the
-spirit of a walrus or bear for Tongak (familiar spirit), spears himself
-through the jacket, or is speared by others, deep in the breast. When
-this whole performance is not merely a spectacular trick, it seems to
-be quite genuinely done. A line is attached to the deeply embedded,
-barbed spearhead, and the people catch hold of this and pull on it and
-haul the impaled man about, to prove that he is fairly caught, as the
-victim of a hunt might be. The conjuror is bathed in blood. At length,
-however, he is let go, and he makes his wounded way alone to the
-seashore. Here the Tongak releases him from the spear, and after a
-short space of time he returns to the festival whole and well as ever,
-with no sign about him except his torn clothing to indicate the rough
-handling he has undergone.
-
-The whole stock-in-trade indeed of the Eskimo conjuror is a certain
-very demonstrable, acquired, occult power. Besides this, he has a good
-memory, an immense amount of shrewdness and cunning, an intimate
-knowledge of animals and their habits, of weather conditions and
-seasons, and, above all, of course, a capacity to judge of his fellow
-men.
-
-It is after the period of training is over that the conjuror becomes
-the bestial, sensual creature, full of cupidity and trickery, he is so
-often represented to be. After graduating in the guild, no further
-prohibitions and denials are observed. He marries, indeed; but no woman
-of the community is safe from him. Under one professional pretext or
-another, he may have his way with each and every one of them, with or
-without her own particular man’s consent. This, however, is seldom
-withheld. On the whole, monogamy is the rule among the Eskimo, although
-there are plenty of exceptions. The writer has known a conjuror with
-three wives, two of whom were sisters.
-
-When a wife is childless it is a great grief both to her and her
-husband. The conjuror is called in for professional advice and to find
-out why she is not favoured by the spirits. He resorts to his
-incantations, but takes an obvious advantage of the situation (quite as
-much for his own ends as for the satisfaction of the would-be parents),
-and all is satisfactorily arranged. Again, when a man is very ill and
-has been performed over by the conjuror, one of the things demanded by
-the latter is that the patient’s coat shall be brought to his house in
-the evening by the man’s wife, and not taken home again until next day.
-
-Eskimo life is full of this sort of thing, and the crudities of
-relationships entering into any of their typical folk-stories make
-these a little hard to reproduce in a manner acceptable to better
-taste. But there is certainly some distinction to be drawn between the
-primitive doings of a people struggling numerically against the
-cruellest conditions of life nature can impose, (who moreover have no
-conception of the ethical idea of morality), and mere promiscuity and
-vice as practised for their own sakes by the “civilised” peoples of far
-more favoured lands.
-
-One of the commonest occasions of calling in the aid of the conjuror is
-during bad weather. The days have been dark and stormy, with bitter
-gales and snowstorms, so that the hunters have been unable to go
-afield. The witch doctor arms himself with a whip—either an ordinary
-dog whip or one made from sea-weed—and a knife, and rushes out to join
-the howling elements. He slashes the wind and shouts down the gale.
-“Taba! Taba! Namuktok!” (Stop! Stop! It is enough!).
-
-And presently the wind drops, and the accustomed death-like stillness
-of the frozen world supervenes upon the uproar.
-
-The conjuror of course could read the signs of the weather even more
-astutely than the practised hunters, and awaited the moment when the
-gale had spent itself for the exhibition of his influence.
-
-After the death of anyone looked upon as more or less of a criminal,
-the conjuror is called upon to drive the evil-intentioned spirit of the
-departed away from his old home. He does this by shading his eyes
-carefully in the effort to perceive the spirit. Then, with a knife or
-spear he rushes about, yelling and shouting, and stabbing as if at his
-invisible foe, calling upon it to depart and go to its own place below.
-At length he vanquishes the spirit, and announces that it is to be
-dreaded no more; by their belief in him he removes their fears and
-restores tranquility of mind and body; whereupon he receives his dues
-and the perturbed and anxious relatives recover their poise and
-cheerfulness.
-
-In order to grasp how seriously the Eskimo believe their lives, and
-every adventure of their lives, to be beset by unseen influences, it
-must be remarked that the main idea of their uncouth religion is that,
-not only man, but all things, animate or inanimate, have souls. Rocks,
-wood, earth, water, sun, moon, stars, fire, fog, icebergs, plants, all
-animals, all creeping things, and even hunting implements, have spirits
-which never die. The Tarnuk, or soul of a man, has the shape of a man,
-but is about one inch in height, and is to be discovered in the hand of
-a conjuror or in that of a new-born babe. The soul of a bear is like a
-bear; that of a walrus like a walrus; but the soul of a deer resembles
-a spider, and that of a salmon, a man! The souls of rocks are like
-sturdy, thickset men; the soul of the earth looks like a piece of
-liver. Animals’ souls are black and hairless, but those of some
-inanimate objects are clothed in deerskin. It would indeed take a great
-deal of study to determine how and why the people should have arrived
-at these fantastic notions and distinctions. Perhaps it would never be
-given to the mind of the modern white man to fathom the workings of
-such primitive intelligence, building up for itself a monstrous,
-nightmare scheme of things, on foundations of the blackest ignorance.
-
-For sheer phantasy, the writer is aware of course that the beliefs of
-the Eskimos are paralleled by those of many other uncivilised peoples.
-It may be that along lines of comparative savage mythology some
-generalisations might emerge which would throw light upon the whole
-subject. Here, however, would lie the study of a lifetime.
-
-Briefly put, the Eskimo religion consists in the belief in a
-multiplicity of spirits, good and bad, and in one Supreme Spirit, of
-whom no fear is felt because he has no evil intention towards man. The
-conjuration and propitiation of the evil spirits is the constant
-business of the conjuring class, although everyone has some degree of
-power to deal with them. Man was made, indeed, by the Great Supreme
-Spirit, and his name was given, Âkkolukju; and woman, Omaneetok, was
-fashioned from his left-hand floating rib.
-
-The Eskimo very highly esteem their own race, but hold Europeans in
-considerable contempt. They have an unpleasant legend of a woman and a
-dog being cast away together in a boat or on a floe, by way of
-accounting for the origin of the whites.
-
-Man’s spirit, like the spirit of everything else, is immortal, and
-destined to a future life in bliss, in the region where the Great
-Spirit presides over a happy community of very prosperous Eskimo, such
-as has already been described. Those who die on the hunt go to this
-heaven, also women in childbirth, and those who die a violent death by
-any sort of accident. The road to this Eskimo heaven is beset by many
-obstacles and pitfalls. It is haunted by savage animals, who lie in
-wait to attack, maim, and kill the wayfarers upon it. Legend has it
-that at the end of this road, at the rim of this world which is the
-gate to the next, two huge rocks are set, confronting each other across
-the narrow path. They sway ominously and often crash together, so that
-the soul seeking heaven has to run the risk of being caught and crushed
-between them as he endeavours to get through.
-
-All illness other than that derived from these causes is looked upon as
-a consequence of sin, i.e., the failure to be a good member of the
-community, the having been of a quarrelsome turn, bad-tempered, mean or
-ungenerous, and the having failed to own up to these things when
-exhorted by the conjuror. When a sick person, having confessed yet
-dies, it is believed that he had some mental reservation and was not
-quite honest about his confession. These bad folk go to the Eskimo
-hell, to the awful realms of Sedna. But a third idea of a sort of
-purgatory comes in, a place to which the damned can escape before they
-are finally admitted to bliss. The spirit of the conjuror is able to go
-below and fight the evil one, and liberate the soul in question. The
-whole transaction is generally a somewhat expensive one for the
-relatives.
-
-All animals have their guardian spirits (Tongak) who have power over
-their souls (Innua). The bear, walrus, killer, ground seal, etc., have
-the best and strongest familiars. It is the custom for each conjuror to
-adopt one of these spirits as his own, in order to avail himself of its
-attributes and powers. The bear is a special favourite, since his
-Tongak is possessed of cunning and intelligence above the ordinary.
-Sedna, the goddess or protectress of the sea creatures in her briny
-underworld, controls and safeguards their bodies only; each one’s
-particular Tongak controls its soul. The conjuror, in turn, controls
-the Tongak; so this important personage can counteract Sedna’s
-machinations against successful hunting. The hunter invokes the aid of
-the conjuror, who thereupon causes the Tongak of the seals to enter
-into the man and lead him to success. This familiar companionship is
-forfeited if the hunter commit some breach of the law and does not
-confess as much to the witch doctor, or if he fail to pay for the
-services rendered.
-
-Eskimo mythology is almost an inexhaustible subject. In addition to the
-active, informing spirit called the Tongak, which everyone possesses
-and which can be invoked for guidance or assistance by every man at his
-need, all other beings, animate and inanimate, possess an indwelling
-spirit peculiar to themselves alone. This individual, permanent,
-presiding spirit is the Innua, something distinct from the patron
-spirit, the Tongak.
-
-The writer has collected an immense mass of notes on the Eskimo
-deities, as they were described to him by the most creditable of the
-conjurors. He believes that his list is unique, and offers the student
-of such matters entirely original material. In it are enumerated no
-less than fifty of these tutelary spirits, with their personal
-descriptions (generally uncouth and imaginative to a degree), their
-supposed habitat—earth, air, or water—and their characteristic
-activities or patronages.
-
-There is Keekut, for instance, a being who lives on the land, in
-appearance is like a dog without hair, and who works in a more or less
-maleficent manner. There is Segook, a spirit with a head like a crow, a
-body like that of a human being, and who is black. It has wings. It is
-a benefactor to the tribesfolk, and brings them meat in its beak. It is
-fabled to exist upon the eyes of deer and seals. The list is
-monotonously fabulous, and could only be wearisome to the general
-reader.
-
-Ataksok lives in the sky. He is like a ball, and has the means of
-bringing joy to his beholders as often as he may be invoked by the
-conjurors. Akseloak is the spirit of rocking stones. When called upon,
-he arrives rolling, and falls flat upon his face at the witch doctor’s
-feet. Ooyarraksakju is a female spirit, and lives in the rocks and
-boulders; is beneficent in her activities.
-
-So the list goes on. It would doubtless have a value all its own for
-the student of primitive imagery or fable, and form an addition to
-ethnographical researches on the Eskimo; but to give it here in extenso
-would perhaps serve little or no purpose.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XV
-
-THE SEDNA CEREMONY
-
-
-At the end of the arctic summer, before the young ice begins to form
-again along the shores, there comes a spell of tempestuous weather,
-with frequent storms and high, rough tides. Food grows more and more
-scarce as sealing increases in risk and difficulty. Those intrepid
-hunters who do venture out, return empty-handed day after day, and it
-grows high time for something to be done. The goddess Sedna is supposed
-to be causing these storms and all this dirty weather at sea, to
-prevent her animals being killed. And so a conjuration has to be
-performed to liberate the seals.
-
-This is the occasion of the most elaborate festival in the Eskimo
-calendar.
-
-It begins by the conjurors, in full dress, calling the people
-altogether to dispense them for a short space from their marriage ties.
-Each witch doctor is masked, and clad in women’s clothing. The idea of
-his amazing get-up, apart from the usual intention to awe the people by
-grotesqueness or hideousness, is to disguise the face and body, to
-efface as it were the well-known individual, to make the people lose
-sight of the conjuror in the representation of a great power at work
-among them. His dress is partly that of a man and partly that of a
-woman, and he carries the usual implements used by both sexes. This is
-to bring the needs of either before the great power, and to intercede
-for their respective needs.
-
-To begin with, the Angakok wears several pairs of nether garments and
-boots, until he looks very big and out of his usual proportions. He has
-a woman’s pointed tunic, whose sleeves are elaborately trimmed with
-fringes and charms. The hood is pulled down over his head, and he wears
-a mask of black skin tattooed all over. On his shoulders he carries an
-inflated sealskin float, and over his arm a coil of walrus hide. In his
-left hand he bears a woman’s skin scraper, and in his right a spear.
-Thus caparisoned, he emerges from his tent and begins by pairing off
-the couples.
-
-The tribesfolk are ranged in two long lines, the men and women facing
-each other, and a lane between. Then the “Kailuktetak” (a minor order
-among the initiate) open the ceremonies. Each conjuror is furnished
-with a deer-horn scraper like a long curved knife (used in the ordinary
-course of things for scraping the newly formed ice from the kyaks as
-they are drawn out of the water), to which is attached a small piece of
-bearskin. He starts off down the living lane, dancing and shouting in
-glee, touching first a man and then a woman with the wand as he goes.
-The two thus indicated pair off, and are man and wife for the next
-twenty-four hours, or perhaps a little longer. The fun is fast and
-furious. Much of the whole thing has been prearranged, and the element
-of surprise is rather subordinate to that of anticipation. The
-conjurors choose among the women for themselves first, and next for
-those hunters who have had sufficient eye for beauty and sufficient of
-this world’s goods to mention the fact privately and persuasively
-beforehand.
-
-There has been quite a stream of visitors to the conjuror’s house of
-late, and quite a number of presents made, which forgetfulness on the
-part of that worthy has failed to return. So that the pairing off on
-this auspicious day is largely a prearranged affair. However, it
-occasions plenty of Eskimo laughter and delight. The enceinte (and the
-old folks) are not included in this adventure. They play the part of
-spectators only, but applaud or deride as heartily as the rest over
-each mating. These women are Kooveayootiksatyonerktoot, i.e.,
-“no-longer-the-material-for-a-rejoicing,” having apparently given
-hostages to fortune already, or having sufficiently fulfilled the hopes
-of the community. Children are paired off first—boys and girls of no
-more than twelve years—and then the adults.
-
-Each couple, as they are selected, join hands and walk away towards the
-man’s dwelling, attended for a little distance by the Kiluktetak who
-has picked them out, dancing all round them and about them like a mad
-thing. If they chance to touch him, they too begin to dance, and to
-voice their excitement in no uncertain manner. On entering the
-dwelling, each drinks a little water and mentions the place of his or
-her birth.
-
-The conjuror has an âvetak slung upon his breast, that is, the entire
-skin of a seal which, inflated, is generally used as a float on the
-kyak. On this day, however, it serves another purpose. As the couple
-presently return to the Kilukletak, they pour water into this, and each
-individual, drinking from it again and again, mentions the place of his
-or her birth a second time. The rite is official, and sets the
-conjuror’s seal upon the proceedings and its consequences.
-
-The root idea of this pairing off is to strengthen a race that might
-easily be weakened by too much inter-marriage, and to increase the
-birth-rate. The writer has elsewhere commented on the defensibility of
-such a custom—from the Eskimo point of view—but it remains to be added
-here that, as regards parentage, the father of a child is always known
-and acknowledged, be he the woman’s husband or her temporary Sedna
-mate. The Sedna offspring is cared for by the regular husband, or by
-the community.
-
-Next comes the extraordinary performance already described, when the
-conjuror is speared through the chest.
-
-After this, the principal Angakok prepares to give battle to Sedna. The
-goddess can be killed; but as she subsequently comes to life again,
-this killing has to take place every year. The whole performance is a
-representation of seal-spearing on the ice. The conjuror coils a rope
-on the floor of a large hut, and leaves a little opening at the top to
-represent the blow hole. Two assistants stand on either side, armed
-respectively with harpoon and spear. A third chants incantations at the
-back of the dwelling. Sedna is supposed to be lured from the
-underworld, and when she comes to the hole, is transfixed at once. She
-sinks away again, dragging the harpoon with her, wounded and incensed.
-The conjurors haul on the line for all they are worth, and recover the
-weapon.
-
-Then the chief Angakut squats upon the floor, with his arms and legs
-bound by a length of light hide line. The lamps are pressed down to
-burn so dimly that it is all but dark. The rest of the folk also sit
-about the floor with their heads bowed, so that none may stare at the
-conjuror’s face. He begins his incantations, rocking to and fro and
-uttering sounds that seem incredible for a human throat to compass. He
-works himself into a state of insensibility (but not before his
-familiar spirit has undone the knots and released him from his bonds.)
-It is this trance which makes such an impression on the tribesfolk.
-They believe that the witch doctor’s spirit has left his body and their
-midst, and has really gone to meet and despatch the powerful figment of
-their myth, to kill her and liberate the seals.
-
-The hardening of the weather soon after this ceremony, when the
-prospects of the sealers naturally improve, seems to the Eskimo mind a
-clear demonstration of cause and effect. Probably the conjuror quite
-believes it, too, and although he has done nothing but hypnotise
-himself and strike awe thereby into the onlookers, this assumption of
-all that he accomplishes in the meantime is as real to him as to the
-others.
-
-After the Kiluktetak—the chief of the whole conjuring band—has
-concluded this séance, he proceeds to make good hunters. Those who are
-ambitious to make a name for themselves in this respect, and greatly
-desire the skins and trappings that come of abundant catches, pay the
-conjuror a walrus hide line; whereupon he resorts again to his
-incantations, and his Tougak causes the soul of a seal to enter the
-body or mind of the young man in question. The whole business may
-perhaps have some result, perforce of suggestion, and the sealer who
-had hitherto doubted his own judgment or prowess, who had felt
-discouraged by ill success, or who had failed perhaps in skill or
-patience, picks up a fortuitous confidence in himself and really has
-better luck afterwards.
-
-It is impossible to believe that these beliefs and ceremonies would be
-so widespread among the people and carry so much weight, were no sort
-of explanation to be sought for them. These folk are trained and
-accomplished hunters; they attribute their success to junketings of
-this description, and by no means wholly to the obvious care they take
-to ensure it. If the ceremonies had no value and proved by experience
-to have no bearing on all these vital matters, even the primitive mind
-would scarcely perpetuate them for their own sakes pure and simple.
-
-In the meantime, while the Kiluktetak has his hands full in the
-underworld, all sorts of other things are taking place, all sorts of
-games going on, in the village above.
-
-There is a tug of war with a rope of walrus hide or white whale hide, a
-contest provocative of uproarious fun, watched by a keen, delighted
-crowd. One end of the rope is manned by the “Ptarmigans” (those born in
-the winter time) and the other by the “Ducks” (those born in summer.)
-If the former yield to the latter, it is taken as an augury of good
-weather for the ensuing season.
-
-After this a curious game is played. One of the lesser conjurors is
-fantastically got up in a number of garments, and in a pair of trousers
-with very narrow legs. The trousers seem to tickle the Eskimo sense of
-the ludicrous in exactly the same way as Charlie Chaplin’s baggy ones
-and his “caterpillar” boots tickle ours. He takes a piece of wood in
-one hand, a skin scraper in the other, and starts capering off, calling
-on all and sundry to follow him and assemble in the “Kagge,” or singing
-house.
-
-The ceremony in the Kagge was performed in the past but now only the
-Sedna ceremony is performed, minus the Kagge.
-
-The Eskimo build larger houses than those they usually occupy, for
-feasting, singing and dancing on particular occasions. The singing
-house is dedicated to a particular spirit which has the shape of a
-bow-legged, hairless man. It is generally built upon the usual round
-plan of the igloo, sometimes three being grouped together, apse and
-transept fashion, with a common entrance (nave). The company disposes
-itself in concentric rings round the house, married women by the wall,
-spinsters in front of them, and a ring of men to the front. Children
-are grouped on either side of the door, and the singer or dancer,
-stripped to the waist, takes his stand amid them and remains on the one
-spot all the time. A pillar of snow in the middle of the house supports
-as many lamps as it requires to illuminate the proceedings and to warm
-the air. Singing festivals and competitions in the Kagge especially
-mark the great occasion of the tribal deer hunting in the spring, so
-that it will be described at somewhat greater length in that
-connection.
-
-As soon as everyone has crowded in, all the new made (temporary)
-couples are bidden to join hands and guide each other out. Everyone is
-laughing, but the pair in question have to preserve the gravity of
-owls. If they yield to the infectious merriment and badinage going on,
-and fail to keep absolutely solemn faces, some grievous sickness will
-befall them. The conjuror touches their feet as they cross the
-threshold, and when he himself follows out the last pair, blows off
-hard, like a seal.
-
-At the risk of wearying the reader with the apparent uncouthness of all
-this (an alien humour is always hard to perceive), one more incident of
-the festival must be given.
-
-The Mukkosaktok possesses himself of a whip with a particularly short
-handle, and starts on a tour of the village on his own account. He
-enters the first house he comes to, and starts to lay about him in
-play. He fillips one of the inmates with the end of his lash, and
-orders him to sing a song—an extempore song of his own composition. If
-the victim fails, another one has to take his place, and so in turn
-until the circle is exhausted. This goes on in every household, all
-sorts of weird howls and chants and guttural distiches being elicited
-by force majeure, until at last the Mukkosaktok is playfully hustled to
-the door and pushed outside.
-
-The underlying idea of much of all this is doubtless that of promoting
-sociability and good feeling all round. The Eskimo are an intensely
-sociable people, and, to the very limited extent of their powers and
-opportunities, delight in entertainment. These festival songs, for
-instance, have required a certain amount of preparation. They are
-composed about some event that has taken place and caught the singer’s
-attention. They have been rehearsed and, if successful, will be
-repeated all through the long winter nights, when the folk spend so
-much weather-bound time in visiting each other and exchanging tales and
-gossip round the igloo lamps. No tribesman likes to be laughed at, so
-he really does his best over his song.
-
-There is a real groundwork of sense about the ceremony of visiting each
-house in turn, and the scramble for presents. In the first place, it is
-a symbol of goodwill and plenty. Each householder is expected to keep
-up appearances by doing this sort of thing, and he uses every effort to
-gain the wherewithal to meet the obligation. This militates against
-laziness and any tendency to hoard—great crimes in the Eskimo
-estimation of things. The hunter strains every nerve to provide the
-things his neighbours scramble for, and the women of the village do
-their utmost, so far as attractiveness and domesticity go, to attach
-such men as husbands. Again, by a general scramble, the poorer and less
-lucky folk get a good many windfalls otherwise unobtainable.
-
-The roysterers flock off in a body, to make the round of the
-encampment, stopping at every man’s house in turn. The owner goes
-inside, makes a selection of all sorts of unconsidered
-trifles—generally bits of sealskin used for the legs of boots, with
-different kinds of sewing sinew attached—and, returning to the
-vociferous crowd waiting outside, scatters these things broadcast.
-There is a grand commotion and no end of noise, as the oddments are
-battled for. As this performance is repeated at every house in the
-village it necessarily takes some time.
-
-Little information is obtainable as to the significance of these games
-or ceremonies, or whatever the Eskimo themselves may consider them. The
-annual pairing off doubtless serves to keep up the numbers of the
-tribe. Women are always in excess of men, owing to hunting fatalities
-among the latter, and other causes; and some of these, although
-married, may be childless. The Sedna proceedings tend to remedy this
-state of things to a satisfactory extent. The writer’s own idea is
-that, in addition to the main responsibilities of the festival, which
-rest on the shoulders of the Kiluktetok, the doings of the lesser
-lights of the order of conjurors are designed more or less to keep
-things going merrily and to establish themselves firmly in the
-good-will of the community.
-
-The main idea of the frequent acknowledgment of breaches of village law
-is undoubtedly to keep the social life intact, to ensure that no
-secrecies and plottings shall break it up, and no hoarding of supplies
-lead to quarrels and injustices. Another feature of the Sedna day is a
-general “confessing” of all these “sins.” Another lesser luminary,
-called a Noonageeksaktoot, dresses himself up in a medley of garments
-and dons a close-fitting cap made from the skull of a ground seal. This
-cap has a peak, to represent a bird’s bill. He binds upon his feet some
-of the sticks used for beating snow from clothes, so that they resemble
-a raven’s, and hops about in imitation of that bird. As often as the
-people come up and accuse themselves of wrongdoing, he betakes himself
-to the beach, to tell Sedna, and returns with forgiveness.
-
-It will be readily understood that it is of great value in the hard
-fight for existence in the arctic that a spirit of hope and
-cheerfulness should be maintained. No one knows this better than the
-commander of an arctic or antarctic expedition, or than the head of a
-trading station! It is quite essential that the Eskimo village should
-make itself a centre of jollity and comfort to the returning hunters,
-and to travellers on the trail. There are sound economic principles
-underneath the queer trappings of some of all this barbaric custom, and
-even sound hygienic laws governing some of the regulations and taboos
-of daily life. That one, for instance, which forbids a woman in
-childbirth to eat any food not provided by her husband, probably acts
-quite beneficially. Eskimo food is very rich and often consumed in the
-raw state, so that a glut of it, as would result from a shower of
-benefactions, would upset the new-made mother.
-
-The Sedna ceremony has been carefully studied by the best ethnologists,
-like Dr. Boas, who have travelled for the sake of science among the
-arctic tribes; but it may be hazarded that the raison d’être of much of
-it could only dawn on an observer who had actually lived for a very
-considerable time in close personal and linguistic touch with the
-people.
-
-The writer offers his interpretations with all diffidence, but believes
-they constitute something original to the descriptions of other
-writers. Those who easily dismiss the whole subject as fantastic
-savagery, much of which is unfit for publication, seem singularly to
-have failed in any real grasp of the character of these benighted, but
-in many ways cheery and genuine, children of the sternest wild in the
-world.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVI
-
-THE NATIVE SURGEON
-
-
-One of the principal offices of the native conjuror is to find out the
-reason of sickness and death, or of any misfortune or disaster
-happening to the tribesfolk. But in this matter of primitive medicine,
-the Eskimo are probably far behind the untutored folk of other
-uncivilised peoples, for the simple reason that, unlike the dwellers in
-temperate or tropical and therefore vegetated regions of the world,
-they have nothing with which to experiment, in sickness, by way of
-herbs and simples. An absolutely barren land, covered for the most part
-of the year with snow, provides no material for the empirical
-pharmacist. Eskimo medical practice consists entirely in incantation,
-in dealings with the spirit world, and in the exercise of an amazing
-and complicated system of fetish and taboo, i.e., the doing or
-refraining from doing all sorts of unreasonable things to attain or
-produce some desired end. In surgery, the conjuror is no less intrepid,
-if considerably more lucky (thanks to an air so pure as to be almost
-sterile) than the ghastly practitioners of West Africa, whose appalling
-anatomical ventures are described in Mary Kingsley’s unrivalled book of
-travel in the Cameroons.
-
-The arctic folk seem to have no glimmering of an idea as to natural
-cause and effect in sickness. Bodily ills and death, to them, admit of
-only one explanation. The sufferer has in some way or other in some
-particular transgressed the communal law. The disorders of women are
-considered as a punishment for the infringement of some of the
-meticulous regulations laid down for their observance at certain times.
-Hence the first business of the conjuror on being summoned to a sick
-bed, is to scare or worry the invalid into the remembrance and
-acknowledgment of whatever he or she may have done contrary to the
-general well-being of the village. He does this after his usual
-fashion, by crawling into the igloo in some particularly horrid guise,
-and sitting down in the darkened place with his face to the wall and
-his features well concealed by his hood, giving vent to the most
-horrific howls, mutterings, ventriloquisms and unhuman-sounding noises,
-at his ingenious command. Then he proceeds to interrogate the sick
-person, and of course wrings some acknowledgment from him or her.
-Treatment—of sorts—may ensue; but as a rule the issue of commands as to
-atonement or compensation is the wind-up of what the Americans would
-aptly describe as the whole “stunt.” Occasionally a piece of flaming
-moss wick from one of the lamps is laid upon the painful part of the
-sufferer’s body and fanned with the conjuror’s breath, or merely blown
-up into the air. All real attempt at cure is left to nature, and it
-must be added that the recuperative powers of a hearty-eating, hardy,
-healthy-blooded people like the tribes of Eskimo, are quite remarkable.
-
-Eskimo flesh has wonderful healing power. The writer has seen the most
-fearful gashes quickly close and heal up without any precautions or
-dressing whatever. One case he certainly thought would have a fatal
-termination. A hunter was repairing his implements, a small box of
-tools lying on the ground beside him. A large file without a handle
-happened to be sticking straight up out of the box. The man’s foot
-slipped on the ice and he fell, in a sitting posture, straight upon the
-file. He sustained a deep punctured wound. It was merely bandaged with
-some very dirty strips of soiled skin underclothing, and inflammation
-and intense suppuration presently set in. At no time did the wound
-receive any further attention, but in due course the hunter was about
-again, as though nothing had happened.
-
-Something, however, must be said for the conjuror as an anatomist. By
-virtue of his calling and of his continual dealing with animals of all
-kinds, he knows the positions of joints, muscles, ligaments, veins and
-arteries, and can find any one of them. Some men have more aptitude in
-this respect than others, and these occasionally act as surgeons. A
-young woman, who may be called Omanetok, the daughter of one of the
-minor conjurors, developed a large mysterious swelling in the groin.
-There was acute inflammation, pointing to deep-seated pus in
-accumulation. A native surgeon was called in, and after examination he
-pronounced for an immediate operation. He decided to lance the
-swelling. A time was arranged, and by special request the writer was
-allowed to be present.
-
-The surgeon arrived, accompanied by two hefty fellows as assistants
-(his “dressers,” probably, in an enhanced state of things!) His lancet
-consisted of a rough piece of all-round, useful steel, inserted into a
-piece of ivory by way of a handle. The blade was about two inches long
-and had a rounded end instead of anything so convenient as a sharp
-point. This blade had, however, been filed, in an attempt at an edge.
-In addition, there was a small oilstone. Both stone and instrument were
-very dirty. The operator began by spitting on the oilstone and
-sharpening the lancet upon it, afterwards wiping the latter with a
-soiled piece of birdskin previously used for scouring out the cooking
-pots.
-
-The patient was then “prepared” by her mother. She was laid flat upon
-the bed bench, and the part to be operated upon was exposed. The
-surgeon, wetting his fingers in his mouth, proceeded to moisten and
-slightly cleanse (!) the skin. Then the two assistants grasped Omanetok
-by the legs, her mother held her head, and two more helpers held her
-well down by the shoulders. The conjuror inserted the lancet simply by
-pressing on it and sawing it in, backwards and forwards, until it had
-gone deep enough to reach the pus. Omanetok squirmed considerably, but
-her nurses had her well in hand. The contents of the swelling were
-expelled by repeated pressure, and wiped away from time to time with a
-little bit of dirty mouse or lemming skin. When this was finished, the
-wound was covered by a piece of lemming skin, licked by the operator’s
-tongue and stuck on over the place.
-
-Two days afterwards the patient was walking about, well and jolly as
-ever she had been in her life.
-
-Apropos of the extraordinary command the conjurors universally exercise
-over the people, and of the paramount psychic influence they establish
-in the community, it is not too much to say that they hold every man’s
-life in their hands. We know how the fatalistic-minded Asiatic can die
-by auto-suggestion. The Eskimo, too, dies by suggestion, even when
-strongly against his will.
-
-A fully qualified practitioner, well known for a sensual and
-self-indulgent man, was particularly tenacious of his purposes and able
-to bide him time. He had long desired the good-looking half-breed wife
-of a certain hunter, and had frequently approached the man on the
-question. Contrary to the general rule, in this instance he was
-consistently refused. Now, Moneapik, the hunter, was a skilful fellow,
-well able to provide himself and his wife with food and clothing. He
-was careful, too, and rather exclusive, not liking to squander his
-gains upon the lazy folk of the village, after the generally accepted
-fashion. For this reason he was unpopular. He had his own circle of
-friends, however, and was content not to enlarge it. The conjuror had
-nothing to work upon so far as Moneapik was concerned, except the
-latter’s superstition. The man was neither poor, nor feckless, nor
-friendless.
-
-At length a long spell of bad weather set it, bringing in its train a
-season of sickness and semi-starvation. The conjuror was expected to
-set matters right by his arts and incantations; but on this occasion he
-had only a signal failure to register. He loudly excused himself for it
-on the ground that the spirits were profoundly offended by the
-unsociable practices of Moneapik. He had committed the heinous offence
-of keeping largely to himself; he had not given freely to the
-tribesfolk. Only by his death could the powers be propitiated and the
-famine ended. The majority of the villagers were prone enough to agree
-with this, for over and over again the hunter had set their greed at
-nought. Whereupon the conjuror boldly faced the man, stated the
-incontrovertible facts, pronounced his death sentence, and departed
-saying: “I command you to die!”
-
-Moneapik was a strong, healthy man, in the prime of life and the pink
-of condition. Normally, he should have lived to a ripe old age. But so
-ingrained was his belief in the conjuror, in his power to get into
-communication with the spirit world, that this command was virtually
-fatal. He said: “I am commanded to die!” He gave up his active
-occupations, withdrew into his tent, ate and drank very sparingly, and
-within four days was dead. They sewed up the body in skin blankets and
-left it on the rocks of a neighbouring island, to be devoured by foxes.
-The writer visited the spot a few days later—but only bones remained.
-
-Friends had indeed visited Moneapik in his tent before the end, and
-argued with him, laughed at him, tried by every possible means to
-disabuse the man’s mind of its obsession. But all in vain. The victim’s
-sole response was, “I am commanded to die!” And die he did, although it
-was by no means a death from starvation. It was death by suggestion.
-
-The conjuror, of course, obtained his own ends.
-
-An account has already been given of the conjuror spearing himself in
-the breast during the Sedna ceremony, and appearing no whit the worse
-for it shortly afterwards. Although this extraordinary action may often
-perhaps be simulated by a trick, (the performer concealing a bladder of
-blood under his tunic and merely stabbing that), there seems to be
-sufficient evidence that such feats are within the compass of the
-genuine practitioner. No less authority than Dr. Boas gives an instance
-of an Angatok, on the island of Utussivik, who thrust a harpoon through
-his body and was led through the village by twenty-five men. Another
-conjuror, at a place called Umanaqtuaq, on finishing his incantations,
-“jumped up and rushed out of the hut, to where a mounted harpoon was
-standing. He threw himself upon the harpoon, which penetrated his
-breast and came out at the back. Three men followed him, and holding
-the harpoon line led the Angatok, bleeding profusely, to all the huts
-in the village. When they arrived again at the first hut, he pulled out
-the harpoon, lay down on the bed, and was put to sleep by the song of
-another Angatok. When he awoke after a while he showed the people he
-was not hurt, although his clothes were torn and they had seen him
-bleeding.” (Monograph on the Central Eskimo, by Dr. Boas.)
-
-The underlying idea in the treatment of all sickness (as distinguished
-from accident) being that some spirit is offended and is punishing the
-delinquent, it becomes necessary to discover what custom has not been
-complied with or what observance has been omitted, or what prohibition
-has been neglected. The science of divining what spirit, too, is
-antagonised, comprises perhaps the whole volume of Eskimo fetish and
-superstition. The conjuror knows beforehand, of course, the character
-and the failings of any individual he may be called upon to attend. He
-makes a shrewd guess from hearsay what the man may have been doing, and
-by skilful questions and half accusations, manages pretty generally to
-get at the core of the matter and extort more or less genuine (if
-wholly irrelevant) confession.
-
-There are some crimes for which there is no forgiveness, such as having
-communion with the dead, especially the Toopelat, i.e., the earth-bound
-spirits of indifferent folk. If the sick man confesses to this, there
-is no hope of cure for him. Adown the long interrogatory we come upon a
-few questions which illumine the apparent nonsense of all the rest with
-gleams of good human sense and logic: Have you stolen from the sick?
-Have you greatly lied about your neighbours or your race? Have you been
-abusive to the old folk? And—for a woman—have you concealed a
-miscarriage?
-
-Otherwise the questions turn upon whether the patient (if a woman) has
-worked upon forbidden sorts of skins, i.e., heavy and arduous work
-likely to upset her (if she is enceinte), at certain seasons; whether
-the meat of land and sea creatures has been eaten at the same meal;
-whether shell fish were gathered when seal should have been hunted;
-whether lamps were cleaned during a time of taboo, etc., etc. The
-underlying idea of half these prohibitions is lost in the obscurity of
-time immemorial, and the Eskimo to-day can account for them no better
-than by saying, “As our fathers did, so do we.”
-
-The invalid thoroughly believes in the authority and omniscience of the
-conjuror. He racks his brains for the remembrance of some breach of the
-unwritten social law, and generally succeeds in the effort, and so
-complies with what is required of him. Should he be so grievously ill,
-however, that the conjuror can elicit no sort of response, should the
-sickness be obviously leading to death, the failure of all these
-proceedings is taken as proof positive that a crime has been committed
-beyond the power of the witch doctor’s machinations to palliate,
-because beyond the power of the spirits to forgive.
-
-In any less serious case the practitioner has a peculiar method whereby
-to determine the probable duration of the sickness, and also its
-gravity. He has among his assistants minor conjurors called the head or
-leg lifter, as the case may be; and an incantor whose business it now
-becomes to squat upon the floor with covered head and improvise a chant
-for the occasion. He is called the Kunneyo.
-
-As soon as this wail begins the others assistants bind a piece of wood
-upon the sick man’s head with a length of thong, and lift it
-tentatively as if in the act of weighing it, asking the spirit
-meanwhile wherein the patient has offended. If the head is inert and
-heavy feeling, he is judged to be guilty; if it feels light, he is
-innocent. Sometimes the wood is bound upon the leg, and this is lifted
-instead of the head. When this examination is over and the patient has
-promised to comply with any orders given him, the conjuror commands,
-“Let the bindings be cast off.” This is done, and he pursues, “Let the
-cause of guilt be cast away, and let him recover.”
-
-The penalty imposed often takes the form of some abstinence to be
-observed for a time. When the illness has been brought about by
-gluttony or exposure, this injunction, joined to a period of rest and
-quietness, may prove quite enough to restore the patient to his
-accustomed health. Nature does her own work. Should there have been
-some real fear or disquiet of mind, the whole thing simply resolves
-itself into a faith cure. Incidentally, the Angatok maintains his
-inflated authority, and earns a fat livelihood. He exacts payment, of
-course—a dog, a sled, a skin, a length of line, and the favours of the
-patient’s wife; and prescribes the use of various charms. These charms
-may be a fringe of deer or bearskin, a spider or beetle sewn up in a
-piece of skin, worn on boot or breast or back, as directed. Most potent
-of all is a scrap of the garment worn during the first year of life,
-and this is always affixed to the cap or hood. Then, of course, a
-present has to be given to the spirit. Some small article is placed
-among the rocks and dedicated.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVII
-
-SPORT AND HUNTING
-
-
-A whole book could be written on Eskimo sport and on the Eskimo methods
-of hunting generally. These methods are based, of course, on an
-intimate knowledge and experience of the habits and characters of the
-arctic birds and animals. Something has already been said in this
-connection about seals and seal hunting. But a little space must now be
-devoted to some account of a few more of these methods and adventures.
-
-With the coming of March, the sealing season has set in. The days begin
-to draw out, the sun climbs higher in the heavens, and even sheds a
-faint warmth now on the lee side of shelter, if there be no movement in
-the air. The seals are arriving in droves, and their young are being
-born in their caves under the snow, all over the wide expanse of the
-ice off shore.
-
-A spirit of restlessness seizes upon the tribesfolk. The hunting
-weapons are gladly brought out for examination and getting in
-readiness; the small hunting sleds are put in order; the heavy winter
-deerskin clothing is laid aside and the lighter garments of summer
-sealskin put in thorough repair, to don as soon as the tribe shall be
-ready to move off en masse to the sealing grounds. Mysterious meetings
-take place between the Angakooeet and the chiefs, when the spring
-campings are fully discussed and arranged among them.
-
-At last the great day arrives when, with much shouting and bustle, the
-sleds are loaded and the dogs harnessed. Each hunter and his wife
-assemble and pack their belongings—the lamp, the cooking pot, the box
-of small tools, the large knife for building (i.e., for cutting out
-blocks of snow), spears, lines, spare skins for clothing, etc., etc.,
-etc. The baby is popped into the mother’s hood; the boy takes up his
-station by the team, to learn to drive and manage it, and with many a
-shout, much touching of noses in farewell, cracking of whips, laughter
-and joking, each outfit pulls out and drives away, off into the frozen
-bay.
-
-The old folk are left behind in the village, to await the end of the
-season, to dress the skins brought in to them every now and again by
-boys returning from the camps. Sealmeat abounds; everyone gorges to
-Eskimo repletion and lives in luxury. The ground is covered with skins,
-pegged out to dry in the sun, prior to being scraped, washed, and
-prepared for making up.
-
-The newly flensed hide is first freed from its inner layer of fat and
-blubber, and this is rendered down for oil for the lamps. The fur is
-then washed with warm water to remove the grease. Then small holes are
-pierced all round the edge of the skin, and the whole is pegged out to
-its full extent on a frame, or merely on the ground, to dry and sweeten
-and bleach in the genial brightness of the arctic spring day. After
-this process, the inner membrane is first pared off, and the skin is
-ready to be tailored. Everyone left behind in the village on shore is
-kept busy at this sort of work.
-
-As the spring sealing season wears on towards the arctic summer, an
-entire change comes over the activities of the tribesfolk. They have,
-now, to prepare for the long trail inland to the feeding ground of the
-deer. Stacks of provisions are accumulated, and the boats and kyaks got
-ready for the trip to the head of the fiord, whence the expedition will
-make its start. The framework of the umiaks is carefully examined, and
-new pieces put in where required. All thongs and lashings are
-strengthened or renewed; secondary skins in former times were prepared
-as boat coverings, to be discarded when they became so waterlogged as
-to check the pace. As a rule, one of these large travelling boats is
-owned and shared by several families, and will contain the whole of
-their effects.
-
-At length these preparations are complete. The day comes when a general
-packing up absorbs all the energies of the tribe. Tents are struck and
-folded away at the bottom of the boat, together with big consignments
-of sealskin buckets and hunting weapons. The women ship the ponderous
-and unhandy oars, children and dogs pile in on top of everything, and
-the men take up their travelling stations fore and aft, in readiness to
-defend the transport from any sort of attack, or to launch a harpoon at
-any likely prey.
-
-They pull away joyously and hilariously on the great summer trip. As
-often as the wind will allow they hoist the great square sail made of
-seal intestine, and one member of the crew takes up a station beside it
-with a water bucket, to keep it constantly wet. Otherwise it would dry,
-and split into ribbons before the breeze. At the present day canvas
-sails are used.
-
-Every now and again, as they coast along among the islands, they put in
-here or there for fresh supplies of drinking water. At night they fetch
-some well-known point for an encampment. The umiaks are moored, heather
-and driftwood collected, fires lit, kettles slung, and the evening stew
-set to simmer, while the men forage afield for the next day’s
-provender. Then, rolling themselves up in their blankets, the
-travellers drop off to sleep right there on the ground, under the
-shelter of whatever cover it may afford, to be up and under way again
-before sunrise next morning.
-
-The days pass very pleasantly. The scenery is grand, the weather clear
-and sunny; the water, gemmed with islands dark brown and green, is
-still as a mill-pond. The fleet of primitive, uncouth-looking skin
-boats, filled with barbaric northern folk with tattooed faces and
-guttural speech, reproduces a picture of pre-historic times. Many of
-these scenes of Eskimo life and enterprise are deserving of record by
-the best of artists, if only to bring before us in these effete days of
-over-civilisation a vivid, still existent, picture of the very earliest
-adventures of the human race.
-
-At length the head of the inlet is reached. The boats proceed up river
-at high tide to the appointed place of debarkation. Here the umiaks are
-hauled well inshore, unloaded, dismantled, and turned over, to be
-covered with a pile of stones against the time of the hunter’s return.
-The personal treasures of the women are also hidden away in some safe
-cavity among the rocks, and left there. Then the loads are carefully
-apportioned all round, and made up in bundles according to the strength
-of their carriers. The men bear the weapons and ammunition only and
-travel light, in order to go on ahead and secure game on the trail.
-Children are lightly loaded, and the old people carry nothing but their
-own belongings; so that the bulk of the heavy transport falls on the
-able-bodied women of the tribe. Each one toils along under tent poles
-and coverings, piles of skins and meat, and the baby of the family into
-the bargain. The whole staggering load is hoisted on to the woman’s
-back and secured by lashings round the waist and a broad leather band
-round the forehead. She is almost wholly eclipsed by the enormous
-burden.
-
-So they file off, one by one, from the point of landing, and make their
-way to the uplands and the appointed general meeting place of all the
-tribes engaged upon the annual hunt. Thither many such parties
-converge: the people from Fox Channel, the tribe from the neighbourhood
-of Kikkuktâkjuak, or Big Island, the Saddlebacks, the Noovingmeoot from
-Frobisher Bay, and as many more from north, south, east and west. They
-time themselves all to arrive as punctually as possible. The spot is a
-high plateau among the hills, at the head of the inlet described above.
-
-When at last all the tribes have assembled, the elders hold a general
-meeting and decide upon the direction and the details of the
-prospective hunt. As soon as this important business is settled the
-people give themselves up en masse to a few days’ holiday-making.
-
-It is the height of arctic summer; food abounds; and friends meet each
-other once again after a year of separation. The people are care-free
-and happy. No danger threatens from any direction. So that Eskimo good
-spirits attain their highest pitch, and for a short time the people
-abandon themselves to their every hospitable and sociable instinct, to
-their love of jollity and fun, to sports all day, to singing,
-entertainments, feasting and story-telling of an evening and well into
-the night.
-
-The sports are inter-tribal. There are running and wrestling matches,
-too, races and competitions of all sorts. The youth are keenly aware of
-being watched by the bright, sloe-eyed, laughing girls, and of being
-criticised or applauded by the elders. As true a sporting spirit of
-emulation, good temper and fair play obtains in this far-away arctic
-festival as on the famous “playing fields of Eton,” and as many a
-romance comes of it as well. For this is an immensely important social
-and fashionable function among these primitive folk, and men and
-maidens meet and strike many a match of their own.
-
-There are contests with the bow and arrow. Poles are fixed in the
-ground with skins suspended from them to represent deer and seals. The
-vital spot, of course, is the Eskimo idea of the bull’s eye. The
-spear-throwing competition calls for a high degree of skill. From the
-top of a fixed, inclined pole, a line is carried to the earth, having
-an ivory ring tied in it half way down. This ring is carefully
-concealed by fringes of hide, and the spear throwers, stationed at a
-recognised distance away, have to cast their weapons deftly through it.
-The attempt demands the greatest accuracy of vision and training of the
-hand. The contests are very keen, and great éclat awaits those who
-distinguish themselves. Their names become household words round the
-igloo lamps all during the succeeding winter, much as those of crack
-footballers become familiar to the sporting manhood of this country.
-
-In the evening come the singing contests—quite one of the most
-important features of the annual festival. Ethnologists generally are
-agreed that the Eskimo excel in poetry and music. Improvisation with
-them is a recognised art. Every man is something of a composer, and is
-called upon whenever festivities are in progress to contribute a number
-of his own to the improvised concert. The form of these songs is quite
-strict, and the melodies, even to unaccustomed European ears, may be
-reduced to accepted notation. Travellers who have but a superficial
-acquaintance with the arctic folk, distinguish little in the extempore
-contests of the Kagge or of the Sedna ceremony but sheer barbaric
-cacophony—yowlings, yells, and monotonous and seemingly endless
-repetition. But there are some to whom Gregorian chant itself conveys
-but little more!
-
-These Eskimo songs deal with any and every subject which may occur to
-the singer, those of a satirical or personal or topical character
-proving the most popular. The contests give rise to untold amusement
-and delight. Nothing is more appreciated in the whole round of the
-programme. As a rule, the competitors are only men. The “ptarmigans”
-(i.e., those born at the end of winter or beginning of spring)
-challenge the “ducks” (or those born in the summer). Each side extols
-its own prowess in hunting, its natal advantages, etc., etc., to the
-detriment of the other. All sorts of ridicule is poured upon the
-opposite party, causing the wildest merriment among the auditors, who
-shriek with laughter at each successful or witty sally, clap their
-hands, and vociferate over the comedian who wins the contest. The
-Eskimo have a very lively sense of fun, and appreciate each home thrust
-and happy skit every bit as keenly as a Cockney music-hall audience.
-
-The Kagge, or singing house, of the summer deer-hunt is, like that of
-the Sedna ceremony, a big round house, similarly tenanted by the people
-in circles around the walls. The summer Kagge is built of sod and
-stones. The women wear skin gloves—the backs black and the palms
-white—and take their station behind everybody else, with the children.
-The men come next, and the Angakooeet, as judges, sit in the front
-circle. The centre of the house is left vacant for the performers.
-
-The first part of the entertainment consists of songs describing the
-exploits of the dead and gone heroes and hunters of the tribe, each
-song having a refrain which is taken up by the women, who sway their
-bodies from side to side as they sing, so raising and lowering their
-arms as to show first a circle of waving white and then a circle of
-waving black hands. Many of these songs are old-established favourites,
-extemporised at first by some individual as his own contribution to
-some occasion, which “caught on” and became part of the tribe’s
-collective musical tradition.
-
-After these come the extempore efforts of the current evening. Each man
-contributes a song of his own, turning upon some event in his career,
-or some more or less poetic fancy which has occurred to him. The songs
-have probably been composed and polished, and possibly practised, in
-private for some time, but the contest is the occasion of their
-publication to the musical world. They are most attentively received,
-and judged by the Angakooeet.
-
-The outstanding event of the evening, to which all look forward on the
-tip-toe of expectation, is the tournament of satires between the
-ptarmigans and the ducks. A ball of thoroughly good-tempered musical
-ridicule is tossed backwards and forwards between each pair of singers,
-accompanied by roars of laughter from the auditors, who hold their
-sides and roll in ecstasies of enjoyment. Tears of merriment stream
-down the women’s faces.
-
-This sort of thing goes on night after night for as long as a whole
-week; and only at the end of that time does the gathering begin to
-break up, and set about the prodigious business of getting on with the
-summer’s work.
-
-As soon as this interlude of festivity and recreation is concluded, the
-tribes separate, each bound for its own appointed sphere of hunting
-operations, independently of the others. The new camp is soon pitched
-in some sheltered valley where there is a running stream, but not too
-close to the selected district, for fear of alarming the shy quarry.
-The men then go daily to search the hills and stalk the deer.
-
-As soon as a herd is located, word is passed down to the camp, and the
-women rally to the men’s assistance. As each arrives she receives her
-instructions from the hunters. A valley is selected having but one
-exit, where there seem to be plenty of boulders. The women station
-themselves in a rough sort of ring all round it, hidden behind the
-rocks, each one with her skin jacket off and slung over her arm.
-Meanwhile, the men creep up, and, keeping also under cover, surround
-the herd, and begin, by the well aimed throwing of first one stone,
-then another, to drive it off in the direction of the selected ravine,
-where other hunters are gathered in force with bows and arrows ready.
-
-The deer, still suspecting nothing, move slowly to their fate.
-Presently one woman, to the rear, and then another, gets up in the open
-and beats her jacket on the rock behind which she had been hiding. This
-scares the creatures forward in the right direction, and drives them
-within the reach of the men. Directly they come within bowshot their
-doom is sealed. So skilful are the hunters that no man expends more
-than an arrow apiece on the deer. The whole herd is killed with the
-greatest celerity.
-
-The carcases are retrieved and skinned, and immense feasting follows.
-These manœuvres are repeated day after day throughout the whole season,
-until the snow begins to appear again on the higher ranges, and the
-arctic summer is on the wane. Gradually the tribesfolk move off again
-towards the lower grounds, the south, and the sea, transporting with
-them huge bundles of invaluable skins and a great quantity of deer
-hams, until one by one they reach the various points of water where
-they left and stored their boats on the up-country trip.
-
-There is no general point of assembly on the return journey. Each tribe
-takes its own course and works its way back towards its own territory
-unaccompanied by the others. The women and children get a brief spell
-of rest when they reach the coast, while the men put in a few days seal
-hunting, to provision the homeward voyage. Finally, the umiaks are
-launched again and reloaded to the very gunwales; the sails are
-hoisted, and the fleet draws away through the archipelagoes of the
-coast to its port of registration!
-
-Not infrequently on one of these big summer hunting expeditions, traces
-are discovered of a winter deer hunting party which had been overtaken
-by disaster. The evidences of some tragedy lie there for all to read:
-the sled torn to pieces, weapons scattered about, small boxes lying
-here and there, and bones—human, canine or vulpine—all over the place.
-Hunger, perhaps, overtook the party; sickness followed. Wolves
-attacked, or the hungry team of dogs got out of hand and tore down the
-hunters, who were unable successfully to defend themselves. The writer
-could instance many a savage incident of this description.
-
-In a very similar district to the one described in the preceding
-account of the summer hunting, there was a fiord leading up to a
-landlocked bay, a favourite resort of the white whales. Regularly each
-year the hunters of the tribes in the vicinity used to go to hunt these
-creatures with gun and spear, taking splendid hauls of meat back to the
-camp, and bales of stout hide to be made into thongs, harness, etc. So
-much flesh and offal was left about on the scene of action that wolves
-came to infest the entire region. In early spring the fiord afforded a
-particularly good sealing ground, being so sheltered from the crashing
-seas outside.
-
-An Eskimo and his son ventured thither one day, intending to form a
-camp there for awhile and put in some good hunting. Mile after mile was
-covered, headland after headland passed, until they were nearing the
-sealing grounds, when the dogs began to show signs of panic. They could
-scarcely be got to proceed, no matter how sharply urged by voice and
-whalehide whip. Nothing moving, however, caught the keen sight of the
-men; no sound came to their ears. Suddenly, just as they passed another
-point, a fierce howl rang out on the bitter air, followed by a chorus
-of more howls, and a large pack of wolves swept out from behind it and
-came into full view. They had been lying in wait until the sled came
-up. Their bleached coats had rendered them invisible until they moved.
-
-The hunters at once realised their deadly peril, and turning instantly
-about, headed at top speed for home. A long fierce chase ensued. There
-was no need to drive the dogs. They strained every terrified nerve in
-their bodies and flew over the ice. The wolves rushed on behind. They
-spread out fanwise, trying to encircle the dogs and cripple them one by
-one as opportunity offered, by making brilliant forward dashes and
-slashing with savage fangs at their legs.
-
-The man thrust a sealing spear into the boy’s hands and shouted to him
-to thrust it at any wolf attempting to attack at close quarters at side
-or rear, while he himself, armed with the terrible dog whip, lashed out
-continuously with the courage of despair, and the effectiveness of
-years of practice. He roared, and swung the murderous thong over the
-backs of the team, so as to protect it from the attacking wolves,
-crippling any one of them who ventured within its sweep. As often as
-one of the bloodthirsty brutes rushed in, it was met with a terrific
-cut, and fell back howling and disabled.
-
-Hour after hour the awful race went on; until at last, when it seemed
-even to the hardy and seasoned hunter that neither he nor the wretched
-dogs could sustain the strain a moment longer, they came in sight of
-the last headland which hid the settlement from view. A final heroic
-effort might yet bring them to safety!
-
-With a yell of encouragement to the exhausted son, and renewed vigour
-in his wielding of the whip, the hunter pressed on. The wolves,
-realising that their prey was actually escaping, redoubled their
-efforts to close in upon the sled. It dashed round the point only in
-the nick of time. The dogs in camp beyond, scenting what was afoot,
-instantly rushed out to give battle to the wolves. The pack, perceiving
-that the odds were now heavily against them, snarled viciously, turned
-coward tails, and vanished....
-
-The refugees arrived in camp in a state of utter collapse. The man’s
-whip arm was swollen beyond further usage, like his tongue, and his
-voice had gone. He staggered to his house, and both he and the boy lay
-there for days before either sufficiently recovered to rise and go
-about their ordinary work again.
-
-Many a party have been waylaid by wolves like this, and have not had
-the good fortune to survive. Should there be a shortage of food,
-resulting in subsequent sickness and weakness among the travellers or
-hunters, they fall victims very easily to the rapacity of the savage
-animal denizens of the wild. The male dogs of the teams get killed, and
-the females join the marauding horde and revert to their wolfish state.
-
-
- THE SONG OF THE PINTAILED DUCK.
-
- As sung in Competition in the Kagge.
-
- Samane samiyeyiya, iya, neakoa koololotingoâle
- Sigoole kokiglotingoale aglokugle pooarkretingoagle
- Okagle allotingoarkinna ikkoâto kettemalotikogikgoa
- Ookeonne pissorayakattalale ipâ adyelikjolikpanma
- Iya annungmenik ipa sosooktelaneyonele annamane
- Adyegegaloâgoone kattargit nippotenekpategikkoa
- Issungatoot annenarsuarâyakto.
-
-
-Free Translation of the Song of the Pintailed Duck in Competition with
-the Ptarmigan.
-
-
- “His head is like a swollen thumb joint,
- His beak is like the thumb nail.
- His lower beak is like a shovel, and his tongue is like a spoon.
- They come together (the Ptarmigans) in the winter;
- They walk together, and make a soft sleeping place
- By covering the hard rocks with dung.
- But their breasts freeze hard down to this,
- They flap their wings,
- And try to fly away ...”
-
-
-The singer goes through all the appropriate (if somewhat broad) actions
-of this bit of burlesque, flapping his arms to ridicule the birds
-caught fast on the rocks in their own frozen droppings. The Ptarmigan
-is not slow to respond.
-
-
- THE SONG OF THE HUNTER.
-
- Panneyukpayiyeyâ â sakkokalemukkoa
- Panneyuktarrekâ okeoksaktalimingmat
- Samaniyiyeyeya â sakkokalemukkoa
- Panneyuktarreka oonarramanna panneyaktarrega
- Okeaksaktalemingmat sammiyiyeyiya â
- Ipparramanna toosneksaktangmeta innarlo
- Sângane samiyiyeyeya â oonaralelidlugolemanaeyâ
- Iyuksaktareka innâlo sângane samiyiyeyiyâ â
- Kinnalena imnarlo sângane.
-
-
-Free Translation of the Song of the Hunter:
-
-
- “He is preparing his hunting weapons and his ammunition.
- Mine also are being prepared,
- Because it is again autumn.
- My spear is prepared, and my seal warp.
- Because they catch the sound of my preparing,
- Of my placing my spear,
- In the front of the high cliffs
- The seals have gone away.
- Although the face of the high cliffs
- Smells of the seals”
- (Understood, yet they have gone away.)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XVIII
-
-THE CREATURES OF THE WILD
-
-
-Bear hunting, again, is pursued by the Eskimo with no less zest than
-that of the seal or deer. It forms quite a subject by itself, and calls
-for some description of its own customs, methods, and superstitions.
-
-The bear is much respected by the Eskimo for his intelligence and
-cunning, and his strength. Indeed, they consider him second only, among
-the creatures of the wild, to man himself. It is for this reason that
-they so often choose for their “tongak,” or guardian familiar, the
-spirit of a bear.
-
-One very curious belief about the animal is that the bear himself has a
-tongak (quite distinct from his Tarngnil or soul), and that when this
-spirit requires any new commodity, such as a new seal warp or line,
-which is represented by the black skin round the mouth of its protégé,
-this tongak causes the bear to fall in the hunter’s way and be killed.
-The hunter spares the black skin, and refrains from cutting it when
-flaying the carcase, as an offering to the spirit. A further offering
-of the sort is made by transfixing various portions of the beast’s body
-and entrails on a stake or spear, together with a man’s implement—such
-as a knife, if the bear were a male, or a woman’s implement, such as a
-needle or skin scraper, if it were a female—and exposing the gift for
-three days. At the end of that time it is thrown into the sea.
-
-In bear hunting, the rule is for the skin to go to the first hunter who
-sights the prey (not necessarily the first to kill it.) The best part
-of the body goes to him who deals the fatal blow.
-
-The arctic bear is not an hibernating animal, for it is only the female
-who sleeps through the winter. The pair hunt together until the
-approach of winter, when the female, fat, and in the pink of condition
-after the summer months of good feeding, searches for a suitable place
-in which to retire and bear her cubs. She generally chooses a sheltered
-spot on land, where the snow lies deeply drifted. The two partners
-scratch out a comfortable cave in this, and the female then enters and
-rolls herself up to sleep. The male bear blocks up the entrance, and
-the next fall or drift of snow effectively completes his task, and
-obliterates all traces of the animal’s activities. He takes himself
-off, to roam about at his own sweet will, and attend to nobody’s
-appetite but his own for the next few months, returning to the female
-only in the spring, when she emerges from her hiding place, gaunt and
-hungry, and accompanied by the cubs. The male is always the safer
-creature to hunt at such a season, since the female is then thoroughly
-out of condition and very savage.
-
-Bears are particularly fond of and feed upon the blubber of seal and
-walrus, and resort to many tricks in order to procure it. The older
-generation of hunters studied the habits of the arctic creatures more
-carefully than do the Eskimo of to-day, and affirm many interesting
-things as to the bear’s tactics when on the prowl for food. They—the
-bears—know just as much about seal hunting as the tribesmen know, i.e.,
-that these creatures lie about on the ice in the frozen bays, but are
-so wary of danger that they plunge out of sight in an instant through
-their “agloes” or seal holes at the slightest alarm. The bear goes
-nowhere near the sealing ground at first, but makes his way up any
-slight hill or eminence in the neighbourhood from which he can view the
-seals, and their adjacent holes. He impresses some sort of a map of it
-all, and of the safest route towards it, on his mind, and then makes
-the best haste he can towards the broken ice along-shore. He slides
-down the snow on his haunches like a tobogganist, carefully avoiding
-any rocks and obstacles projecting themselves in his path. After that,
-he creeps along with extraordinary caution towards the first sleeping
-seal he has marked down. He is all but invisible against the white
-background, and he is absolutely silent. He just glides towards his
-victim, and then at the last, when sufficiently close, he rushes
-forward and kills it with a single blow of his paw.
-
-In the latter part of the spring, when the seal holes have become so
-enlarged that several of the animals may be making use of the same one,
-the bear takes careful note of this fact and adopts a bolder plan of
-action. He creeps up to any neighbouring hole, examines it, dives down
-through it, and swims along under the ice towards the place where the
-seals are congregated. He suddenly pops up through their own particular
-hole, thus cutting off their retreat, kills them at his leisure, and
-gorges on their fat.
-
-When hunting walrus the bear adopts different tactics. He knows that
-these creatures are at a great disadvantage on land, but that they love
-to drag themselves up on to the rocks or shore ice, and lie there
-asleep or basking in the sun beneath some cliff, and safely screened
-from their principal enemy—man. When the bear sights a walrus in such a
-position, he risks no direct attack, but takes careful note of the
-situation, loads a massive piece of ice or rock upon his shaggy
-shoulder, and making a cunning détour, works his way to some spot
-directly behind and above his intended victim. Then he launches his
-missile down upon its head. The skull of the walrus is so thick it is
-almost impossible to smash it; but at least the animal is stunned, and
-the bear has only to scramble down and complete his work with a blow or
-two of his paw.
-
-(This method of hunting, incredible though it seems, has been
-emphatically affirmed by several ancient hunters.)
-
-No wonder the human hunter has conceived the highest respect for the
-bear, and is anxious to secure his Tongak for a familiar spirit!
-
-In the water the walrus is a swift and formidable creature, to capture
-whom taxes the kyaker’s utmost skill and courage. The man has nothing
-but his spear and drag, i.e., an inflated sealskin attached to his
-spearhead, by means of which the animal, when transfixed, is prevented
-from diving too deeply or travelling too fast. As he approaches the
-walrus, man and beast manœuvre for an opening. The kyaker, keenly on
-the alert, with a touch of the paddle just keeps his frail craft moving
-until the other, with a sudden grunt and roar, rushes at him through
-the water, rearing right up at striking distance, a terrible vision
-indeed, with huge slavering tusks, eyes bloodshot and glistening with
-rage ... The coolest courage is required to face it!
-
-The hunter pauses there for just that fraction of a second until the
-creature is upon him, then slips aside, and the harpoon drives deep as
-the animal surges past. It instantly dives, intending to come up and
-tear the kyak from beneath. But the drag of the float upon the line
-checks it and causes it to misjudge the distance, so that when it rises
-the kyak is not there. Meanwhile, the hunter has easily kept track of
-the beast’s rush under water, by the air bubbles (or by his highly
-trained instinct), and when its savage head reappears he races up, and
-strikes it in the face before it has recovered from its bewilderment.
-The startled, baffled foe immediately dives again, and remains below
-the surface as long as possible, only to be driven down once more the
-instant it emerges for a breath of air.
-
-At last, utterly exhausted and nearly drowned, it comes up the last
-time and meets its fate at the hands of the plucky and relentless
-pursuer. Should the hunter miss his stroke at the first awful attack
-and fail to get clear, the kyak is instantly overturned and the man
-savagely mauled in the water, the walrus driving its tusks right
-through his body time and time again. Or it sometimes seizes the hunter
-between its flippers and, in full view of the other kyakers, holds him
-under water, coughing hoarse defiance at them all as they rush up to
-the rescue; and then slowly submerges, taking its enemy with it. Such
-are the casualties of arctic life.
-
-One of the very few creatures who seems to have it all his own way in
-the frozen regions of the north is the raven. He supplies an element of
-sheer impishness and insouciance in Eskimo life, without which the
-native might want for a good deal of fun and aggravation.
-
-The bird abounds everywhere. Even in the most bitter and desolate spots
-the raven turns up in a sufficiently glossy and well nourished
-condition. His huge beak is a formidable weapon and always stands him
-in good stead. He is like a spirit of mischief, able to calculate to a
-hair how near to spear or gun he may with safety venture. He is the
-despair of men and dogs alike. He is an expert thief, and cannot be
-excelled in pilfering.
-
-During the day, whilst the hunters are away and there is nothing much
-doing, the raven sits on a crag or other convenient spot overlooking
-the village, and with a melancholic and malignant eye broods in
-disgust. You can almost hear him hoarsely remark:
-
-“What a rotten show! What a poverty-stricken hole! This really is the
-limit! Not a scrap to filch since daybreak!”
-
-Should you pass by, he brightens up and cocks an eye at you in an
-expectant way, as though it were the plainest duty of all bipeds to
-shed scraps and bits for him to enable him to pick up an honest living.
-Although, as a matter of fact, he much prefers a dishonest one.
-
-Towards evening, there is an air of expectancy about the raven group.
-They have trimmed themselves up and sharpened their beaks on any stone
-or pole handy for the purpose. As the hunters begin to put in an
-appearance the birds move off and entrench themselves behind such cover
-as the neighbourhood may afford. They know from experience that man is
-uncertain with his gun, and it may go off unexpectedly with detrimental
-effects to themselves. Anyhow, they prefer to have a boulder in
-between.
-
-Presently one bird, sharper-set than the rest, peers from his
-concealment to see how things are progressing. A croak of disgust at
-the leaden-footedness of events announces his observations to the rest.
-But presently a hunter emerges from his house with a bowl of dainties
-for the dogs (the dainties are more or less putrid), and empties it
-into a tumultuous crowd of them, when each one vies with his neighbour
-in catching and bolting as much as possible in the least space of time.
-At this, there is an ebon rush from the surrounding crags, and a fierce
-rear attack upon the dogs from the voracious birds.
-
-A beak like cold steel driven deep into a dog’s flank just as he is
-engulfing a particularly delicious morsel, tends to make him choke. He
-does so in fact, and his feathered aggressor, striking hard now at his
-nose, snatches the lump of meat from him in the very act of flapping
-and floating off to safety in mid air. The dog, disgusted and
-disappointed beyond expression, sits down and howls maledictions on
-thieves in general and ravens in particular, to the remotest of their
-generations.
-
-No one loves the raven. The hunter uses every art to catch him, but
-generally in vain. He will set out early of a winter’s morning with a
-supply of the most cunning traps he can contrive, and of the most
-tempting bait. Nothing is in sight as he leaves the camp. When he
-reaches the trapping grounds he sets a line of fox traps in all the
-most likely places, and carefully conceals his work with snow. But his
-every movement his been ’cutely watched, and as soon as his back is
-turned there comes an amused and contemptuous croak, as who should say:
-“What an ass! Do you suppose I’m not equal to that?”
-
-The croaker spreads bold wings and sails over to the trap. Inserting
-his bill beneath it like a lever, he simply wrests it over and so
-springs it. In a trice he tweaks out the bait and bolts it. He makes a
-point of being there on the hunter’s return in the evening, just to
-hear his remarks. The bird has the audacity indeed to sit there, close
-by, his head upon one side and a bored expression in his eye, as though
-he were reflecting on the pitiable amateurishness of the whole affair.
-
-“What!” he seems to say. “You call that a snare? And you think you’re
-eloquent about it now! Why, if it comes to that, I could make your hair
-stand on end with the force and aptness of my remarks!”
-
-With a hoarse, derisive note, he rises then and wheels off into the
-arctic empyrean.
-
-The gulls, on the other hand, come well within the category of those
-creatures whom the Eskimo hunter can outwit. These birds are always
-much in demand, both as food and for the sake of their skins, which
-latter, turned inside out, make capital socks. The old men spend a good
-deal of their time in winter, catching gulls.
-
-The hunter builds himself a small igloo among the rough ice by the
-seashore, and creeps inside. He proceeds to cut a hole in the top just
-big enough for the passage of a bird’s body, and round this opening, on
-the outside, he spreads attractive bits of seal meat and blubber. Then
-he prepares to wait. Presently a gull, sweeping by on the endless
-search for food, spies these dainties, and descrying no sign of foe or
-danger, swoops ever nearer and nearer, until at last it alights on top
-of the igloo for a brief second, seizes a morsel and wheels off again.
-Nothing untoward having occurred, the bird grows bolder, returns, and
-finally settles down to the feast outspread in that tempting spot.
-
-Suddenly a hand comes up and grips it by the legs, and drags it
-downwards through the hole. Another hand slides up its body to its
-neck, so that it cannot fight or bite, and in a moment or two the life
-is choked out of it. Bird after bird is caught in this way, until at
-the end of the day the hunter returns to the village under a load of
-white and grey feathers. He laughs delightedly to think how he has
-tricked the greedy gulls, and how his cunning bird-calls have deceived
-one after another.
-
-He recounts the story of it all over the cooking pot into which the
-birds are thrown as soon as skinned, and keeps his women-folk well
-entertained as they sit chewing the skins to pliability in their strong
-white teeth, for the rest of the arctic evening.
-
-Such is a glimpse into the lives of these brave and hardy warriors of
-the North, a country which they love. Fierce and relentless though it
-be, it brings out all the best that is in them. All honour and praise
-to them.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-APPENDIX
-
-ESKIMO DEITIES
-
-
-Sedna. Goddess of sea animals, but not of the sea itself.
-
-Ooluksâk. God of the lakes. He lives by the side of the lakes, and it
-is by his instrumentality that the conjurors get their light when
-performing their rites.
-
-Tekkitserktok. God of the land. He owns all deer. This god is greater
-in power than all the other gods. Offerings are made to this god by
-hunters before going inland for the annual deer hunt.
-
-Kingoatseak. This god lives in the sea and is like a dog in appearance;
-legs very thin like a dog’s. Is not able to come to the surface.
-
-Sinnilktok. Lives on the land. One side of this god is like a woman,
-one side like a dog. It is a benevolent spirit, gives seals to the
-conjurors and cures the sick, but is very much afraid of Eskimos and
-dogs.
-
-Keekut. Lives on land and is like a dog without hair. Is an evil
-spirit, and does evil of various kinds.
-
-Segook. This spirit has a head like a crow and a body like a human
-being, and is black, and has wings. It does good and brings meat to the
-Eskimos in its beak. It eats the eyes of deer and seals.
-
-Tekkonatelik. A spirit living on land, with a body like a fox, fiery
-eyes, red hair. Benevolent in disposition.
-
-Eeyeekadluk. Lives on land. In appearance like a short man with fairly
-large eyes, black face, very short legs, eyes frightful to look upon.
-Lives in a stone igloo. Good spirit, tries to cure the sick.
-
-Mummerreak. Lives on land. Like an Eskimo, masc. gender, but has his
-hair dressed like a woman, and his skin clothes have no hair upon them.
-Good spirit; is helpful by heaving rocks at the deer and killing them.
-The deer are then found by the Eskimos.
-
-Angootelooktook. Lives on land. Like a man in appearance. His thighs
-are crippled and he wobbles whilst walking. Benevolent spirit; keeps
-close to the conjurors and pays heed to his incantations.
-
-Nooesarnak. Lives on land. In appearance like a woman with thin legs.
-Is clothed like a woman, in deerskins. Has a deerskin mask. Benevolent
-spirit; always wishes to give deerskins to the people.
-
-Toodlanak. Lives on land. Like a woman in appearance. Is a great
-walker, and walks about with bedding and tupik (tent) on her back, as
-the people do when on journey inland. She has no husband. Has a nice,
-pleasant face, and wears long boots. She is a good spirit and gives
-deer to the Eskimo, i.e., drives them within their reach.
-
-Aipalookvik. This spirit is malevolent and lives on the sea bottom. Has
-a large head and face, human in appearance, but ugly like a cod’s. Is a
-destroyer by desire, and tries to bite and eat the kyakers (canoemen).
-
-Akktonakjuvoonga, or Akktonakjuak. Live under the sea. Are very thin in
-appearance and like Eskimo. They congregate and cry to each other,
-“Shevarktonakjoovoonga” the others replying, “Shevarktonakjoovtit” (I
-am a rope. Reply: Thou art a rope).
-
-Ogjunak. Lives on land. Like an Eskimo in appearance, one side black,
-one side white. Has European clothes. Face covered with hair, thin
-legs, arms and body. Good spirit; tries to cure sick.
-
-Koopvilloarkju. Lives on land. Like a small Eskimo man. Has orange
-coloured hair and orange coloured clothes. Good spirit; said to give
-food and heal the sick.
-
-Ooleooyenuk. Lives by the side of the sea. Like a man in appearance,
-his clothes made with lapels and scallops. Eats seaweed. Good spirit.
-
-Aulanerk. Lives in the sea. Like a stout man. Is naked, writhes about
-and makes waves. Is a source of joy to the Eskimo.
-
-Naput. Lives on land. Like an Eskimo; is very thin, cannot walk, but
-jumps and stands upright. He is never angry, and classed as a good
-spirit.
-
-Angemenooat. Lives on land. Is like a woman, very thin, almost like a
-skeleton, and has a string round her waist like a woman who is carrying
-a child. Has very large clothes and a benevolent mind.
-
-Ookomark. On land. Like a short, thin man; very large, round face, a
-stout body. Is very strong, and is dangerous if seen by mortals. Lives
-in a stone house and kills animals with stones. (Not benevolent; temper
-uncertain; needs careful handling.)
-
-Oovineroolik. Those who were flesh. (These are the spirits of departed
-Europeans.) Lives on land; clothed in a shirt; like a European in
-appearance. Has a boat and hunts seals. Is captain of three boats, two
-of which are manned by other departed Europeans. When boats are full,
-meat given to the Eskimo. Very good spirits.
-
-Isserootaitok. (Also spirit of departed European.) Lives on land; like
-a European in appearance. Wears a jacket with no buttons. Always
-arrives from a distance; has no boat, but tries to do good.
-
-Nessallogainalik. Lives on land. Has no clothes, but wears a hat. Is
-like a European; generally sleeps on a ship; is supposed to be the
-spirit of a departed sailor.
-
-Oyakkert. This spirit is an Innooa and not a Tongak. It lives in small
-stones; in appearance like an Eskimo. Has a very red face, black body
-and legs; is very thick and heavy. Only seen by conjurors. Has no
-attributes.
-
-Koodjânuk. First-class spirit. When the world was made he was a very
-large bird with black head and hooked beak, white body. Lived on the
-boundary of the earth. Is a benevolent spirit; a trifle blasé through
-age. Has the ability to give, and does so when asked by the conjurors;
-also heals sick.
-
-Poolaiyittok. Lives on land, by the side of the lakes. Like a woman in
-appearance. Is accompanied by a dog like a white fox. Is a good spirit
-and does good when asked.
-
-Bokoomeerlekuluk. Lives on the sea bottom. Like a fox in appearance,
-with fur, black in colour; but head and face like an Eskimo, with two
-tusks, which are used for cleaning purposes and for killing seals,
-which are given to the Eskimo.
-
-Kalluktok. Lives on land and on ice. Like an Eskimo, dwarf in size. He
-has dogs and a sled, and is a good hunter. Gives meat to the people. Is
-very swift with his sled.
-
-Kulaktok. Lives on land in a tupik (skin tent). Like an old woman, and
-is the mother of Kalluktok. She is always cooking, because her son is a
-good hunter. She constantly gives food to her Tongak friends.
-
-Kallooetok. Lives on land. Is father to Kalluktok and husband of
-Kullaktok. Is a bad hunter because his eyes are bad. He is very old and
-does not go hunting, but has good intentions to the Eskimo.
-
-Tooktooak. Lives on land. In appearance like a very tall and thin
-Eskimo; hair white and clothing black, with no hair upon it. He is a
-good spirit in intention.
-
-Koodjaunuk. Lives at the bottom of the sea. Like an Eskimo. Wears no
-clothes and is very thin. He is not one to be feared, as his intentions
-are good, and comes to the surface when called by the conjuror.
-
-Toonekotario. This one lives on land. It is the spirit of one of the
-departed Tooneet. Carries a bone harpoon and comes as often as invoked.
-
-Aumanil. Lives on land. Has a black face with fiery eyes. His mouth,
-eyes and nostrils are very much distended when invoked by the conjuror.
-He guides whales.
-
-Nootaitok. The spirit of the Icebergs. He lives in the sea. Like an
-Eskimo. Wears black skin clothes; has bright eyes. Is a good spirit and
-gives seals when invoked.
-
-Adjarkpaluk. Lives on land. Is like a European, and wears European
-clothing. When invoked, will come from afar. He has a good mind and
-does no harm.
-
-Tooloreak. Lives on land. Is like an Eskimo. Has large canine teeth
-like a bear; wears bearskin trousers, and the rest of his clothing of
-skin without hair. Black in colour. Does not wear boots, but has feet
-covered with hair. He is a good spirit and comes when called and gives
-as desired.
-
-Agloolik. He lives beneath the ice like an ogjuk (large seal). He is
-the guardian spirit of the seal holes. He gives seals to the hunters
-and is considered a good spirit.
-
-Akselloak. This is the spirit of the rocking stones. When called he
-arrives rolling, and when near the conjuror he falls flat upon his
-face. He is considered a good spirit.
-
-Tootegâ. Like a small woman. Lives on an island in a stone house. She
-is able to walk upon the sea.
-
-Ataksâk. Lives in the sky. He is like a ball in appearance. He has the
-means of joy within himself, thus he is the joy-giver. He comes to the
-Eskimo as often as he is invoked by the conjuror. He has many strings
-of charms on his clothing. These charms are very bright, and as he
-moves about his body is also bright. He arrives to the people as a ball
-of light and causes the people to be joyful, through the conjuror. He
-is considered good.
-
-Kingmingoarkulluk. He lives on land and is like a very small Eskimo.
-When seen he is always singing with joy: “Kingmingoarkulloona, aiya,
-samaiya.” (He is always singing that he is Kingmingoarkulluk.) The name
-is derived from a plant called Kingmingoark. He is of a good
-disposition and does good generally.
-
-Ooyarraksakju. She lives in the big stones, hence her name: the
-beautiful material for stone. She is like a large woman in appearance,
-lives on various things; gives various good things to the Eskimo.
-
-Ooyarrauyamitok. Has no definite abode. Is sometimes on earth,
-sometimes in Heaven. In appearance is like a middle-aged Eskimo. Is
-frequently invoked by the conjurors when incanting. This god, if
-invoked and respected, gives meat to the Eskimo, i.e., enables them to
-get it.
-
-Koodloorktaklik. He lives far inland and is like a man, and does not
-wish to be seen by the Eskimo. He is bright and clean in appearance. He
-does good to the sick, and in various other ways. He generally has the
-ends of deer hoofs attached to his clothing, hence his name.
-
-Kakkakotauyak. Lives on land. Is like a dog in appearance; whitish in
-colour. His eyes and nose are black. He is not dangerous, even if seen.
-Has amiable characteristics, and sends seals and deer to the Eskimo.
-
-Sillaseak. Lives inland, and is like a man. He never goes on the ice.
-He lives in a house under the earth. He gives deer to the Eskimo when
-deer-hunting.
-
-Kattakju. Lives on land and is like an old woman in appearance and is
-very tall. She presides by the sick when the conjuror tests them by
-head or leg lifting, and reveals their state and chances of recovery to
-the conjuror.
-
-Niksiglo. This god lives under the earth, and is like one with a hook
-with a line attached. In appearance he is like a walrus tusk. Is a
-Tongâk and a bad character. He steals the hunters’ deer and seals by
-hooking them. He is seen only by conjurors, if seen at all. There are
-many of these tongâk, and if seen stealing by a conjuror, the aid of
-another conjuror is called in. The spirits of these two search for the
-thief; the one watching from above, the spirit of the other goes below,
-and from a small house beneath the dwelling of the tongâk he is able to
-see the thief and kill him.
-
-Angalootarlo. Is another tongâk and a bad character. He is a great
-thief, and has two personalities; is like a large bearded seal when in
-the sea, and like an Eskimo when on the ice. He is frightful in
-appearance and works in the following manner: When an Eskimo is alone
-at sea in his kyak, this tongâk, keeping the appearance of a seal,
-swims away from land and is followed by the kyaker. When a long
-distance from land, the tongâk gets upon a piece of ice and the kyaker,
-having no gun, follows to kill him, still thinking it is a seal. Then,
-when the hunter draws near, the tongâk changes his shape into that of
-an Eskimo, and kills the hunter, he having no gun and being very near.
-
-Pukkeenegak. Lives on land, and is like a small woman, with face
-tattooed. She has her hair done up into a knot on the top of her head,
-like the Greenlanders. She has very large boots (kummeek) made from the
-deer legs, and has very nice clothes. Is quite aristocratic. She is
-considered to be good, as she gives food, material for clothes, and
-babies, to the Eskimo women.
-
-Toodlayoeetok, also Pissukyongnangetok. Has his abode in Heaven. Is
-like an Eskimo, but cannot walk, hence his name: he who is unable to
-walk. He sits on a small sled and propels himself along by two sticks.
-He is considered a good deity. He catches animals by lassooing them,
-and then gives them to the Eskimo.
-
-Orkshualik. Lives on land ice.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-FOOTNOTE
-
-
-[1] Occasionally the black fox is taken, and the fortunate hunter may
-receive as much as the equivalent of $100 to $500 for a pair of fine
-skins, from the Agent.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AMONG UNKNOWN ESKIMO ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that:
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.